You are on page 1of 314

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK

MANUAL CODE HDBK P/N:

3AL 97457 ADAA Ed.01 TQCVA

1642 Edge Multiplexer Compact Rel.1.2


C.T. OPERATORS HANDBOOK

ORIGINALE INTERLEAF: FILE ARCHIVIAZIONE: cod ANV (PD1-PD2)


No PAGINE TOTALI PER ARCHIVIAZIONE: 314
DIMENSIONE BINDER SORGENTE (du ks): 23.946 kBytes

INFORMAZIONI PER IL CENTRO STAMPA - ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS


STAMPARE FRONTE/RETRO RECTO-VERSO PRINTING
COMPOSIZIONE ED ASSIEMAGGIO DEL MANUALE:
HANDBOOK COMPOSITION AND ASSEMBLY:
3 REGISTERS FROM 1 TO 3 ARE NECESSARY
step

No pages

1
2
3

LABELS
FRONT
NE Management Operators Handbook

2
308

TOTAL A4 PAGES:
TOTAL A4 SHEETS:

310
155

WARNING FOR AUNITS OTHER THAN AITALY

Labels are done according to AItaly binder format.


Source file: MSWORD-OFFICE PROFESSIONAL 2000

1/4
3AL 97457 ADAA Ed.01 TQCVA

numbered
from
to

1/308

308/308

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK


ALCATEL OPTICS GROUP

Site

Shanghai
Originators

1642 Edge Multiplexer Compact Rel.1.2


C.T. OPERATORS HANDBOOK

Domain:
Division:
Rubric:
Type:
Distribution Codes

ASB
FCG - OND
1642 Edge Multiplexer
1642 Edge Multiplexer Compact Rel.1.2 C.T. OPERATORS HANDBOOK
Internal:
External:

Approvals
Name
App.
Name
App.

The data below will be used for the labels:

1642 Edge Multiplexer Compact Rel.1.2


.
STM-1 Multi-Service Edge Multiplexer
for Customer Premises
.
C.T. OPERATORS HANDBOOK

3AL 97457 ADAA Ed.01 TQCVA

VOL. 1/1

2/4
3AL 97457 ADAA Ed.01 TQCVA

1642 Edge Multiplexer Compact Rel.1.2


.
STM-1 Multi-Service Edge Multiplexer
for Customer Premises
.
C.T. OPERATORS HANDBOOK

3AL 97457 ADAA Ed.01 TQCVA

VOL. 1/1
1642 Edge Multiplexer Compact Rel.1.2
.
STM-1 Multi-Service Edge Multiplexer
for Customer Premises

C.T. OPERATORS HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA Ed.01 TQCVA

VOL. 1/1
1642 Edge Multiplexer Compact Rel.1.2
STM-1 Multi-Service Edge Multiplexer
for Customer Premises
.
3AL 97457 ADAA Ed.01 TQCVA - C.T. OPERATORS HANDBOOK VOL. 1/1

1642 Edge Multiplexer Compact Rel.1.2


STM-1 Multi-Service Edge Multiplexer
for Customer Premises
3AL 97457 ADAA Ed.01 TQCVA - C.T. OPERATORS HANDBOOK VOL. 1/1

1642 Edge Multiplexer Compact Rel.1.2


.STM-1 Multi-Service Edge Multiplexer
for Customer Premises
.
3AL 97457 ADAA Ed.01 TQCVA - C.T. OPERATORS HANDBOOK VOL. 1/1

3/4
3AL 97457 ADAA Ed.01 TQCVA

END OF INTERNAL DOCUMENT1

4/4
3AL 97457 ADAA Ed.01 TQCVA

C.T. Operators Handbook

Alcatel 1642 Edge


Multiplexer Compact
STM 1 Multi-Service Edge Multiplexer for Customer Premises

1642EMC REL.1.2

3AL 97457 ADAA Ed.01 TQCVA

3AL 97457 ADAA Ed.01 TQCVA

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

NE Management Operators Handbook

01

2005-07-18

ED

DATE

CHANGE NOTE

Chang Haiyan, Wu Jie


Lennart Priester

Fan Chunquan
Quan Yong

APPRAISAL AUTHORITY

ORIGINATOR
Rel 1.2

1642 EMC C.T. OPERATORS HANDBOOK

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

1 of 308

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK

3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

2 of 308
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

1642EMC REL.1.2 C.T. OPERATORS HANDBOOK

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK

3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

3 of 308

TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS .................................................................................................................. 4
LIST OF TABLES AND FIGURES............................................................................................... 10
INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................... 16
1.1
SCOPE ................................................................................................................................. 16
1.1.1
Document scope......................................................................................................... 16
1.1.2
Target audience ......................................................................................................... 16
1.2
TERMINOLOGY .................................................................................................................... 16
1.2.1
Acronyms and abbreviations ..................................................................................... 16
1.2.2
Glossary of terms....................................................................................................... 16
2.

GENERAL INTRODUCTION ON VIEWS AND MENUS ................................................ 17


2.1
EML--USM VIEW ORGANIZATION ..................................................................................... 17
2.2
INTRODUCTION ON THE EML--USM MENU OPTIONS .......................................................... 18
2.2.1
Views menu introduction ........................................................................................... 20
2.2.2
Configuration menu introduction .............................................................................. 21
2.2.3
Diagnosis menu introduction..................................................................................... 22
2.2.4
Supervision menu introduction .................................................................................. 23
2.2.5
Download menu introduction .................................................................................... 24
2.2.6
Equipment menu introduction.................................................................................... 24
2.2.7
Board menu introduction........................................................................................... 25
2.2.8
Port menu introduction.............................................................................................. 25
2.2.9
Transmission menu introduction ............................................................................... 27
2.2.10
Synchronization menu introduction........................................................................... 29
2.2.11
External Points menu introduction............................................................................ 30
2.3
ADVICES ON NAVIGATION PRINCIPLES ................................................................................ 35

3.

NE MANAGEMENT SUPERVISION .................................................................................. 38


3.1
3.2

4.

NE MANAGEMENT STATES .................................................................................................. 38


NE SUPERVISION AND LOGIN .............................................................................................. 38

NE MANAGEMENT GENERAL CONFIGURATION ...................................................... 40


4.1
ACCESS STATE (ALLOW OR INHIBIT NE CRAFT ACCESS)..................................................... 40
4.1.1
Switching from the OS to the Craft Terminal access state ........................................ 40
4.1.2
Switching from the Craft Terminal access state back to the OS access state ........... 41
4.2
NE TIME MANAGEMENT ..................................................................................................... 41
4.3
ALARM CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................... 43
4.3.1
Procedure to modify an ASAP ................................................................................... 43
4.3.2
Alarm Severity Assignment Profile Management (ASAP) ......................................... 44
4.3.3
Set SdhNe Alarms Severities...................................................................................... 50
4.3.4
Allow/Inhibit Alarms Notifications............................................................................ 51
4.3.5
Alarms resynchronization ...................................................................................... 52
4.4
RESTART NE....................................................................................................................... 53

5.

SECURITY MANAGEMENT................................................................................................ 54

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

4 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

1.

5.1
5.2
6.

SET MANAGER LIST .............................................................................................................54


SET ACD LEVEL..................................................................................................................55

EXTERNAL INPUT AND OUTPUT POINTS MANAGEMENT ......................................56


6.1
DISPLAYING EXTERNAL POINTS ...........................................................................................56
6.1.1
Expanding or reducing external points list................................................................58
6.2
EXTERNAL POINTS CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................58

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

7.

DIAGNOSIS MANAGEMENT ..............................................................................................62


7.1
ALARMS SURVEILLANCE .....................................................................................................62
7.2
ABNORMAL CONDITION LIST ..............................................................................................64
7.3
LOG BROWSING...................................................................................................................65
7.4
REMOTE INVENTORY ...........................................................................................................66
7.4.1
Upload remote Inventory ...........................................................................................66
7.4.2
View Remote Inventory...............................................................................................67

8.

COMMUNICATION AND ROUTING MANAGEMENT ..................................................70


8.1
OVERVIEW ON COMMUNICATION AND ROUTING DOMAIN...................................................70
8.1.1
OSI Protocol on QB3/Qecc ........................................................................................70
8.1.2
IP over OSI tunnelling for ATM/IP............................................................................72
8.1.3
OSI over IP tunnelling on QB3 ..................................................................................72
8.2
COMMUNICATION AND ROUTING VIEWS ..............................................................................74
8.3
LOCAL CONFIGURATION .....................................................................................................76
8.4
OS CONFIGURATION ...........................................................................................................78
8.5
NTP SERVER CONFIGURATION ...........................................................................................79
8.6
LAPD CONFIGURATION ......................................................................................................80
8.7
ETHERNET CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................83
8.8
REACHABLE ADDRESS PREFIXES CONFIGURATION .............................................................85
8.9
MANUAL ES ADJACENCIES TABLE CONFIGURATION...........................................................86
8.10 IP STATIC ROUTING CONFIGURATION .................................................................................88
8.11 OSPF AREA TABLE CONFIGURATION .................................................................................90
8.12 IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION OF POINT-TO-POINT INTERFACES.........................................91
8.13 ISA BOARD IP ADDRESS .....................................................................................................91
8.14 OSI OVER IP .......................................................................................................................92
8.15 IP OVER OSI .......................................................................................................................93

9.

EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT ............................................................................................96


9.1
INTRODUCTION AND NAVIGATION .......................................................................................96
9.2
SET AND CHANGE OR REMOVE BOARD/SUBRACK ...............................................................101
9.3
BOARD ADMINISTRATIVE STATE ........................................................................................103
9.3.1
Setting a board in service.........................................................................................103
9.3.2
Setting a board out of service...................................................................................104
9.3.3
Consulting a Board's Administrative state...............................................................104
9.4
SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................................104
9.5
REMOTE INVENTORY .........................................................................................................105
9.6
SHOW SUPPORTING EQUIPMENT .........................................................................................107

10.
10.1
10.2

BOARD VIEW ...................................................................................................................108


INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................108
BOARD VIEW MENU ..........................................................................................................111

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

5 of 308

10.2.1
10.2.2
10.2.3

PORT VIEW ...................................................................................................................... 115

11.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................. 115


11.2 PORT VIEW: ELEMENTS ON THE TP................................................................................... 116
11.3 PORT VIEW MENU ............................................................................................................ 118
11.4 SET RETIMING .................................................................................................................. 119
11.5 AU4 CONCATENATION ..................................................................................................... 121
11.6 PHYSICAL MEDIA OPTION MENU ....................................................................................... 121
11.6.1
Show Optical Configuration .................................................................................... 123
11.6.2
Single Fibre Configuration...................................................................................... 124
11.6.3
Ms Configuration..................................................................................................... 126
11.6.4
Line Length Configuration ...................................................................................... 127
11.6.5
Ethernet Port Configuration.................................................................................... 127
11.6.6
Ethernet Mapping Protocol ..................................................................................... 129
11.6.7
Control Path Activation........................................................................................... 130
11.6.8
LCAS Configuration ................................................................................................ 131
11.7 SHOW SUPPORTING BOARD .............................................................................................. 132
11.8 NAVIGATE TO TRANSMISSION VIEW ................................................................................. 133
11.9 NAVIGATE TO MONITORING VIEW .................................................................................... 135
11.10
PORT MODE OVERVIEW ................................................................................................ 136
12.

TRANSMISSION VIEW .................................................................................................. 140

12.1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................................ 140


12.2 VIEW ELEMENTS ............................................................................................................... 141
12.3 VIEW LAYOUT .................................................................................................................. 142
12.3.1
View Description ..................................................................................................... 142
12.3.2
Number of TPs Displayed in Transmission View .................................................... 143
12.3.3
Naming TPs ............................................................................................................. 143
12.3.4
Dynamic View Behaviour ........................................................................................ 143
12.4 TRANSMISSION VIEW ACCESS AND MENU .......................................................................... 143
12.5 ADD TP ............................................................................................................................ 145
12.5.1
TP Search................................................................................................................. 145
12.6 TP CONFIGURATION ......................................................................................................... 152
12.6.1
High Order TP Configuration ................................................................................. 152
12.6.2
J0 Section Trace management ................................................................................. 155
12.6.3
Low Order TP Configuration .................................................................................. 155
12.7 TP FRAME MODE CONFIGURATION .................................................................................. 157
12.8 TP THRESHOLD CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................... 159
12.9 TERMINATE/DISTERMINATE TP ........................................................................................ 160
12.9.1
Terminate TP ........................................................................................................... 160
12.9.2
Disterminate TP....................................................................................................... 161
12.10
MONITORING OPERATIONS ........................................................................................... 161
12.10.1
Creation/Deletion ................................................................................................ 162
12.10.2
Configuration....................................................................................................... 164
12.11
STRUCTURE TPS ........................................................................................................... 165
12.12
LOOPBACK .................................................................................................................... 167
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

6 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

11.

Port Access .............................................................................................................. 111


Change Physical Interface....................................................................................... 112
Show supporting equipment..................................................................................... 113

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

12.12.1
Loopback Configuration ......................................................................................167
12.12.2
Loopback Management ........................................................................................170
12.13
PHYSICAL MEDIA ..........................................................................................................172
12.13.1
Set Domain ...........................................................................................................173
12.14
NAVIGATION COMMANDS .............................................................................................174
12.14.1
Expand..................................................................................................................174
12.14.2
Hide ......................................................................................................................175
12.14.3
Show Supported Board.........................................................................................176
12.14.4
Navigate to Port View ..........................................................................................177
13.

CROSS-CONNECTION MANAGEMENT.....................................................................179

13.1 INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................179


13.1.1
Overview...................................................................................................................179
13.1.2
Multiplex Structures for SDH...................................................................................180
13.1.3
Definition of Termination Points (TP) .....................................................................183
13.1.4
Mapping Tables: TP Names.....................................................................................187
13.1.5
Cross-Connection Types ..........................................................................................188
13.1.6
Cross-Connection Protection...................................................................................189
13.2 OPERATIVE SEQUENCE TO EXECUTE CROSS-CONNECTIONS ..............................................191
13.3 CROSS-CONNECTIONS MANAGEMENT ...............................................................................193
13.3.1
Search Criteria.........................................................................................................194
13.3.2
Cross-Connection List..............................................................................................196
13.3.3
Actions available ......................................................................................................199
13.4 CREATE/MODIFY CROSS-CONNECTIONS ...........................................................................199
13.4.1
Cross-Connection Parameters .................................................................................200
13.4.2
Create a Cross-Connection......................................................................................206
13.4.3
Modify a Cross-Connection .....................................................................................211
13.5 ACTIVATE/DEACTIVATE/DELETE CROSS-CONNECTIONS ..................................................214
13.5.1
Activate a Cross-Connection....................................................................................214
13.5.2
Deactivate a Cross-Connection ...............................................................................215
13.5.3
Delete a Cross-Connection ......................................................................................215
13.6 SPLIT AND JOIN CROSS-CONNECTIONS ..............................................................................215
13.6.1
Split a Cross-Connection .........................................................................................215
13.6.2
Join Two Cross-Connections ...................................................................................216
13.7 PROTECTION SWITCHING ...................................................................................................217
13.8 PRINT ................................................................................................................................218
13.9 SHOW CROSS-CONNECTED TPS ........................................................................................219
14.

OVERHEAD MANAGEMENT........................................................................................222

14.1 INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................222


14.2 OH CONNECTION OVERVIEW ............................................................................................222
14.3 OVERHEAD VIEWS .............................................................................................................223
14.4 OH CROSS CONNECTION ...................................................................................................224
14.4.1
Cross-Connection Management for Overhead dialog .............................................227
14.4.2
The OH TP are present in MS, RS and VC4 TP Class.............................................230
14.5 OH TP CREATION .............................................................................................................230
14.6 OH TP DELETING ..............................................................................................................231
14.7 OH PHONE PARAMETERS ..................................................................................................232
15.

PERFORMANCE MONITORING..................................................................................234

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

7 of 308

16.

SYNCHRONIZATION MANAGEMENT ...................................................................... 256

16.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................. 256


16.2 SYNCHRONIZATION MANAGEMENT .................................................................................. 258
16.2.1
Displaying the Synchronization View...................................................................... 258
16.2.2
Synchronization View .............................................................................................. 259
16.2.3
Timing Source Configuration .................................................................................. 262
16.2.4
Synchronization Protection Commands .................................................................. 265
16.2.5
Synchronization Configuration for T0/T4 and T4 squelch criteria......................... 266
16.2.6
SSU Configuration................................................................................................... 268
16.2.7
Remove Timing Reference ....................................................................................... 268
16.2.8
Change T4 <-> T5................................................................................................... 269
16.2.9
Change 2Mbit ->2MHz ........................................................................................... 270
16.2.10
Set and Remove T0 Equal T5............................................................................... 271
16.2.11
Transmission of SSM Quality Configuration....................................................... 272
16.2.12
Show Timing Source ............................................................................................ 273
17.
17.1
17.2
18.

ISA PORT CONFIGURATION....................................................................................... 275


INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................. 275
ATM/ISA/ETH BOARD TTPS CREATION.......................................................................... 275
SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT ....................................................................................... 283

18.1 GENERALITIES AND DESCRIPTIONS ................................................................................... 283


18.1.1
Naming Conventions................................................................................................ 283
18.2 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD OPERATIVE SEQUENCE ................................................................. 284
18.2.1
Software Download upgrade ................................................................................... 285
18.2.2
NE Software package installation procedure .......................................................... 285
18.3 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD MANAGER MENU ........................................................................ 287
18.4 INIT DOWNLOAD ............................................................................................................... 289
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

8 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

15.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................. 234


15.1.1
Overview .................................................................................................................. 234
15.1.2
Supported Performance Counters ........................................................................... 234
15.1.3
Far End(FE) and Near End (NE) Performance Counting ...................................... 236
15.1.4
Bidirectional Counting (24 h Bi) for QoS................................................................ 237
15.1.5
End to End (e-e 24h) Performance Counting .......................................................... 237
15.1.6
Performance Monitoring on AU-PJE...................................................................... 238
15.1.7
Tandem Connection Termination (TCT) and Monitoring (TCM) ........................... 238
15.1.8
Performance Data Collection.................................................................................. 238
15.1.9
Data Collection........................................................................................................ 239
15.1.10
Performance Monitoring History ........................................................................ 239
15.1.11
Thresholds............................................................................................................ 240
15.2 CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................... 241
15.3 DISPLAY CURRENT DATA ................................................................................................. 245
15.4 DISPLAY HISTORY DATA .................................................................................................. 248
15.5 PM THRESHOLD TABLE SELECTION ................................................................................. 250
15.6 PM THRESHOLD TABLE CREATION / MODIFICATION / DISPLAY ....................................... 252
15.6.1
Creation ................................................................................................................... 252
15.6.2
Modification............................................................................................................. 253
15.6.3
Display..................................................................................................................... 254

18.5
18.6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

19.

SW PACKAGE ACTIVATION AND UNITS INFORMATION ......................................................290


MIB MANAGEMENT............................................................................................................292
MULTIPLEX SECTION PROTECTION MANAGEMENT........................................295

19.1 MSP INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................295


19.1.1
Architecture types & options....................................................................................295
19.1.2
Access MSP functionalities from USM ....................................................................295
19.1.3
MSP status in port view............................................................................................296
19.2 MSP CREATE ....................................................................................................................299
19.3 MSP MANAGEMENT .........................................................................................................301
19.4 MSP DELETE ....................................................................................................................302
19.5 MSP COMMANDS ..............................................................................................................302
19.6 MSP OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................................304

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

9 of 308

Figure 1 EML--USM main view organization. ................................................................... 18


Figure 2 Menu options flow chart -- 1 .............................................................................. 31
Figure 3 Menu options flow chart 2 .............................................................................. 32
Figure 4 Menu options flow chart 3 ............................................................................... 33
Figure 5 Menu options flow chart 4 ............................................................................... 34
Figure 6 Menu options flow chart 5 ............................................................................... 35
Figure 7 NE EML-USM Main view. ..................................................................................... 39
Figure 8 NE management: setting the access state. ................................................... 40
Figure 9 Consulting and/or setting the local NE time................................................... 41
Figure 10 NE Time dialogue box. ..................................................................................... 42
Figure 11 Configuring Alarm Severity Assignment Profile. ........................................... 44
Figure 12 ASAPs Management dialogue box. .............................................................. 45
Figure 13 ASAP Edition dialogue box............................................................................... 47
Figure 14 Set ASAP dialogue box. ................................................................................... 49
Figure 15 Set SdhNe Alarms Severities ............................................................................ 51
Figure 16 Inhibit alarm notification .................................................................................. 51
Figure 17 Inhibit alarm notification .................................................................................. 52
Figure 18 Allow alarm notifications ................................................................................. 52
Figure 19 Alarm re--synchronization ................................................................................ 52
Figure 20 Restart NE confirmation ................................................................................... 53
Figure 21 Set Manager list................................................................................................. 54
Figure 22 Set ACD level ..................................................................................................... 55
Figure 23 Opening the external points view.................................................................. 56
Figure 24 External points view. .......................................................................................... 57
Figure 25 Expanding or reducing the external points list. ............................................ 58
Figure 26 Configuring external points. ............................................................................ 58
Figure 27 External input point configuration dialogue box......................................... 59
Figure 28 External output point configuration dialogue box (MANUAL) .................. 59
Figure 29 External output point configuration dialogue box (FLEXIBLE).................... 60
Figure 30 Alarm Surveillance ............................................................................................ 63
Figure 31 Alarm Surveillance ............................................................................................ 63
Figure 32 Abnormal condition menu option ................................................................. 64
Figure 33 Example of abnormal condition list ............................................................... 64
Figure 34 Example of loopback dialog window management ................................. 65
Figure 35 Log Browsing option in Network Element context view.............................. 66
Figure 36 Upload Remote Inventory Menu .................................................................... 67
Figure 37 Remote Inventory confirmation request ....................................................... 67
Figure 38 Remote Inventory completed ........................................................................ 67
Figure 39 View Remote Inventory.................................................................................... 68
Figure 40 Routing subdomain organization example .................................................. 72
Figure 41 OSI over IP tunnelling on QB3.......................................................................... 74
Figure 42 Comm/Routing options ................................................................................... 75
Figure 43 Local Configuration.......................................................................................... 78
Figure 44 OS Configuration .............................................................................................. 79
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

10 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

LIST OF TABLES and FIGURES

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 45 NTP Server Configuration .................................................................................80


Figure 46 LAPD Configuration dialog ..............................................................................82
Figure 47 Creation LAPD Interface ..................................................................................82
Figure 48 Confirmation to change LAPD Role................................................................83
Figure 49 Ethernet Configuration.....................................................................................84
Figure 50 Ethernet Configuration -- L2 only parameter................................................85
Figure 51 RAP Configuration.............................................................................................86
Figure 52 MESA Configuration...........................................................................................88
Figure 53 IP Static Routing Configuration .......................................................................89
Figure 54 OSPF Area Table Configuration .......................................................................90
Figure 55 IP Address Configuration of Point-to-Point Interfaces .................................91
Figure 56 ISA Board IP Address .........................................................................................92
Figure 57 OSI over IP Tunnelling configuration................................................................93
Figure 58 IP over OS ...........................................................................................................95
Figure 59 Equipment Overview -- Subrack level............................................................97
Figure 60 Equipment Overview -- Rack level 1 ..............................................................98
Figure 61 Equipment Overview- Rack level 2 ...............................................................99
Figure 62 Equipment Overview - NE level.....................................................................100
Figure 63 Equipment menu.............................................................................................101
Figure 64 The list of different boards relative to an NE slot (example).....................102
Figure 65 Consulting a boards administrative state. .................................................104
Figure 66 Software Description dialogue box...............................................................105
Figure 67 Remote Inventory............................................................................................106
Figure 68 Select Printer ....................................................................................................106
Figure 69 Select Output Format for file .........................................................................107
Figure 70 Equipment Overview -- Subrack level..........................................................107
Figure 71 Equipment view: select the SDH port on a board. ....................................109
Figure 72 Example of a Board View ..............................................................................110
Figure 73 Board menu options ........................................................................................111
Figure 74 After Port Access selection (example).....................................................112
Figure 75 Change Physical Interface ............................................................................113
Figure 76 Confirmation Infomation.................................................................................113
Figure 77 Subrack level....................................................................................................114
Figure 78 Example of a SDH Port View ..........................................................................116
Figure 79 Termination TP box. .........................................................................................117
Figure 80 G.783 Adaptation TP box...............................................................................117
Figure 81 Examples of port menu options (SDH, PDH)................................................119
Figure 82 Set Retiming enable (before)........................................................................120
Figure 83 Set Retiming enable (after) ...........................................................................121
Figure 84 Physical media menu (SDH port example) .................................................123
Figure 85 Visualizing a port optical parameters ..........................................................124
Figure 86 Bidirectional Transmission on a single fibre..................................................125
Figure 87 Single Fibre Configuration View....................................................................126
Figure 88 Ms Configuration .............................................................................................126
Figure 89 PDH Line Length Configuration View...........................................................127
Figure 90. Ethernet Port Configuration Dialog ..............................................................128

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

11 of 308

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

12 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 91. Information dialog .......................................................................................... 128


Figure 92. Ethernet Mapping Protocol (EXAMPLE) ....................................................... 129
Figure 93. Control Path Activation ................................................................................. 130
Figure 94. LCAS Configuration ........................................................................................ 131
Figure 95. LCAS Monitoring.............................................................................................. 132
Figure 96 Board View Example. ..................................................................................... 133
Figure 97 Navigate to Transmission view selection ................................................. 134
Figure 98 After Navigate to Transmission view selection ....................................... 135
Figure 99 View of Monitoring Operations (example) ................................................. 136
Figure 100 Port Mode Menu Option.............................................................................. 137
Figure 101 Port Mode Overview Dialog........................................................................ 137
Figure 102 Set the selected port mode ........................................................................ 139
Figure 103 Symbols Used in Transmission View............................................................. 141
Figure 104 Transmission View Area ................................................................................ 142
Figure 105 Transmission menu options .......................................................................... 145
Figure 106 TP Search Dialog, Initial State...................................................................... 146
Figure 107 Information Window ..................................................................................... 146
Figure 108 TP Search Dialog with Various TP Selections ............................................. 147
Figure 109 TP Search Dialog with Status Information Displayed ................................ 148
Figure 110 Symbols in TP Search .................................................................................... 148
Figure 111 Board History Check List............................................................................... 149
Figure 112 TP Search Dialog with Different Filtering Options ..................................... 150
Figure 113 Information... Dialog for Search Process................................................ 150
Figure 114 Print to Printer................................................................................................. 151
Figure 115 Print to File ...................................................................................................... 151
Figure 116 Example Printout ........................................................................................... 152
Figure 117 High Order TP Configuration ....................................................................... 153
Figure 118 J0 Configuration............................................................................................ 155
Figure 119 Low Order TP Configuration ........................................................................ 156
Figure 120 TP Frame Mode Configuration.................................................................... 158
Figure 121 Degraded Signal Threshold selection ........................................................ 160
Figure 122 Terminated TP ................................................................................................ 161
Figure 123 Monitoring Operation Menu ....................................................................... 161
Figure 124 Monitoring Operations Creation/Deletion................................................. 162
Figure 125 Display of POM and TCM in Port View (example) ................................... 163
Figure 126 Display of POM and TCM/TCT in Port View (example)............................ 163
Figure 127 Monitor Configuration.................................................................................. 164
Figure 128 Structure TP...................................................................................................... 166
Figure 129 Loopback configurations ............................................................................. 167
Figure 130 Open Loopback Configuration................................................................... 169
Figure 131 Port Loopback View ..................................................................................... 170
Figure 132 Open Loopback Management ................................................................. 171
Figure 133 Loopback Management............................................................................. 172
Figure 134 Physical Media .............................................................................................. 173
Figure 135 Set Domain..................................................................................................... 174
Figure 136 Expand TPs....................................................................................................... 175

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 137 Hide TPs ...........................................................................................................176


Figure 138 Board View .....................................................................................................177
Figure 139 Port View..........................................................................................................178
Figure 140 SDH Multiplex Structure according to ITU-T G.709 ....................................181
Figure 141 Frame Construction within the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy...............182
Figure 142 SDH Transport Level Diagram ......................................................................186
Figure 143 PDH Transport Level Diagram.......................................................................187
Figure 144 Unidirectional Connection ..........................................................................188
Figure 145 Bidirectional Connection .............................................................................189
Figure 146 Example of Broadcast Connection with Three Legs ...............................189
Figure 147 Bidirectional Connection - Input Protected..............................................190
Figure 148 Bidirectional Connection - Input Protected..............................................190
Figure 149 Protected Broadcast ....................................................................................190
Figure 150 Drop and Continue - Normal ......................................................................191
Figure 151 Cross connection management cascade menu ...................................194
Figure 152 Cross-Connection Management Dialog (Initial State) ...........................196
Figure 153 Cross-Connection Management Dialog (After Search).........................198
Figure 154 Open Menu to Create Cross Connections ...............................................200
Figure 155 Protection Criteria .........................................................................................202
Figure 156 Cross-Connection Icons ...............................................................................205
Figure 157 Creation of a Unidirectional, Non-Protected Cross-Connection ..........205
Figure 158 Create a Bidirectional Protected Cross-Connection ..............................207
Figure 159 Search for Cross-Connection Input ............................................................209
Figure 160 Create an Unprotected Broadcast Cross-Connection ..........................210
Figure 161 Create a Protected Broadcast Cross-Connection..................................211
Figure 162 Unprotect a Unidirectional Cross-Connection .........................................213
Figure 163 Protect one Leg of a Broadcast Connection...........................................214
Figure 164 Split/Join Unprotected Bidirectional Cross-Connection ..........................216
Figure 165 Split/Join to Protected Bidirectional Cross-Connection..........................216
Figure 166 Protection Actions Dialog ............................................................................217
Figure 167 Select Printer ..................................................................................................219
Figure 168 Select Output Format ...................................................................................219
Figure 169 Show Cross Connected TPs .........................................................................220
Figure 170 Show Cross Connected VC4 of an AU4 ....................................................221
Figure 171 Overhead options.........................................................................................224
Figure 172 Cross Connection Management for Overhead dialog..........................225
Figure 173 Main Cross-Connection for OverHead dialog .........................................226
Figure 174 OH TP creation...............................................................................................231
Figure 175 OH Search TP for creation............................................................................231
Figure 176 OH TP deleting ...............................................................................................232
Figure 177 Phone Parameters dialog window.............................................................233
Figure 178 Far End Performance Monitoring Principles ..............................................236
Figure 179 Performance Monitoring Option ................................................................241
Figure 180 PM Configuration Dialog (example)..........................................................243
Figure 181 PM question dialog box (example)............................................................243
Figure 182 Current Performance Data..........................................................................245

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

13 of 308

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

14 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 183 Current PM Data Dialog (example)........................................................... 247


Figure 184 History Performance Data ........................................................................... 248
Figure 185 PM History Data Dialog (example)............................................................. 250
Figure 186 Performance Threshold Tables.................................................................... 250
Figure 187 PM Threshold Table Select ........................................................................... 251
Figure 188 Create PM Threshold Table ......................................................................... 253
Figure 189 Modify PM Threshold Table.......................................................................... 255
Figure 190 Internal organization of the SETS................................................................. 256
Figure 191 Obtaining the synchronization view. ......................................................... 259
Figure 192 Synchronization View Example................................................................... 260
Figure 193 Synchronization Menu.................................................................................. 262
Figure 194 Timing source configuration for cross-Connect equipments................. 263
Figure 195 Synch. source configuration for ADM equipment................................... 264
Figure 196 Lockout, Force and Manual commands .................................................. 265
Figure 197 Configuring the T0 or T4 SSM algorithm and the squelch criteria.......... 267
Figure 198 SSU Configuration ......................................................................................... 268
Figure 199 Synchronization source removing .............................................................. 268
Figure 200 Synchronization source removing confirmation ...................................... 269
Figure 201 Change T4 <-> T5 menu ................................................................................ 269
Figure 202 Change T4 <-> T5 confirmation message ................................................. 269
Figure 203 Change T4 <-> T5: command execution .................................................. 270
Figure 204 Change 2Mbit -->2MHz menu..................................................................... 270
Figure 205 Change 2Mbit -->2MHz confirmation message ....................................... 271
Figure 206 Change 2MHz -->2Mbit: command execution ........................................ 271
Figure 207 T5 equal T0 setting......................................................................................... 272
Figure 208 Transmission SSM Quality.............................................................................. 273
Figure 209 Timing Source Example ................................................................................ 274
Figure 210 ATM/ISA/ETH ports Configuration Creation............................................... 276
Figure 211 ATM/ISA/ETH ports Configuration Changing 1 .......................................... 277
Figure 212 ATM/ISA/ETH ports Configuration Changing 2 .......................................... 278
Figure 213 ATM/ISA/ETH ports Configuration path controller .................................. 279
Figure 214 ATM/ISA/ETH ports Configuration navigation ......................................... 280
Figure 215 ISA Port Configuration (FEB6) ....................................................................... 281
Figure 216 ATM/ISA/ETH ports Configuration (FEB6)..................................................... 282
Figure 217 Software Download general principle ...................................................... 283
Figure 218 Software Administration menu .................................................................... 286
Figure 219 Software Package Administration view .................................................... 286
Figure 220 SDH software package installation ............................................................ 287
Figure 221 Equipment view ............................................................................................ 288
Figure 222 Download menu ........................................................................................... 288
Figure 223 SW Downloading dialogue box example................................................. 289
Figure 224 Software download in progress (example) .............................................. 290
Figure 225 Software Package Information dialogue box (example) ...................... 291
Figure 226 Detail software package (example) ......................................................... 292
Figure 227 NE MIB management ................................................................................... 293
Figure 228. MSP Protection Status Examples................................................................. 297

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 229. MSP Create Option.......................................................................................299


Figure 230. MSP Schema Creation .................................................................................299
Figure 231. TP Search ........................................................................................................300
Figure 232. MSP Management Option...........................................................................301
Figure 233. MSP Delete option ........................................................................................302
Figure 234. MSP Commands option ...............................................................................302
Figure 235. MSP Commands ............................................................................................304
Figure 236. MSP overview.................................................................................................305
Figure 237. MSP overview after Search (Example) ......................................................306

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

15 of 308

1. INTRODUCTION

1.1.1 Document scope


The aim of this document is to help the operator understand, configure and
manipulate Network Elements ( NEs ) easily, using the Craft Terminal (CT). The
different functionalities related to the equipment views, the menu items and the
different actions that can be undertaken from these views are described in detail.
1.1.2 Target audience
This document is intended for the operators whose role is to manage the Network
Elements.
The documents that should be read before starting this document are:
--- 1320CT Basic Operators Handbook
The documents of this Handbook that should be read before starting this
document are:
--- Introduction manual
1.2 Terminology
1.2.1 Acronyms and abbreviations
Refer to the Section Introduction manual.
1.2.2 Glossary of terms
Refer to the Section Introduction manual.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

16 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

1.1 Scope

2. GENERAL INTRODUCTION ON VIEWS AND MENUS

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

In this chapter the organization of the EML--USM screen, presented after the NE
login, is described.
First is introduced the view organization, than the accessible menu options are
listed.
At the end some further advice are given for Navigation principles.
2.1 EML--USM view organization
The EML--USM view (see Figure 1.) is the first window presented to the operator
after the login.
It contains the following fields, which provide you with information needed to
manage the NE:
. Severity alarm synthesis,
. Domain alarm synthesis,
. Management status control panel
. View title,
. View area
. Message/state area
The Menu bar and the View area contained in the same NE view permits to
perform all the configuration and supervision and display the specific selected
item.
The view organization is detailed in the Basic Craft Terminal Operator Handbook to
which refer for the description, except for the following information, that differs
according the NE type:
-- Domain alarm synthesis
The different alarm domain type in which can be subdivided the NE is:
Synchronization, External Point, Equipment, and Transmission.
Information about the alarms and status is given in the Maintenance section of this
handbook.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

17 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 1 EML--USM main view organization.

2.2 Introduction on the EML--USM menu options


The menu bar allows performing configuration and supervision functions on the
Network Element.
This paragraph lists all the menu options and then more details on the relevant
contained entries.
For each of them the relevant operative function is briefly introduced.
The flow charts of Figure 2., Figure 3., Figure 4., Figure 5., summarize the menu
options.
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

18 of 308

From chapter 3 on details and operative information on the all the views are
given. They are not presented according the menu option sequence but
according a functional subdivision.
In the menu bar there are permanent menu items always displayed. Staring from
the left, the menus are:

Permanent Menus

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Views (first column).


To navigate among the views and set TMN and Overhead
parameters.

Configuration (second column).


To set general configuration of the NE, set TMN and to show or modify
some parameters (performance monitoring, ATM/ISA/ETH creation,
and cross-connection).

Diagnosis (third column).


To get information about the NE (alarms, performance monitoring,
remote inventory).

Supervision (fourth column).


To set the supervision states (i.e. Craft Terminal enabling).

Download (fifth column).


To manage the NE software (download, MIB management).

Help (last column).


To activate the help.

Further, in the menu bar there are other menus, presented as an alternative, only
when a particular object or option is selected.

Other Menus
o

Equipment (sixth column).


To manage the NE as a whole, setting the boards that compose it.
From the Equipment view the Board view can be accessed.
From the Equipment menu is also possible to start the Specific Terminal
application for the ATM/IP traffic configuration.

Board (sixth column).


To show the physical port available in a specific board. It is the entry
point for the Port view.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

19 of 308

Transmission (sixth column).


It permits to show and set the Termination Point of the equipment, thus
having an overview of the complete signal flow of the various ports.
The menu permits to define all the Cross Connections and manages
the transmission resources, setting the relevant configuration.

Port (sixth column).


To set and show (detailed alarm view) the transmission resources
referred to the Port.

Synchronization (sixth column).


To show and modify synchronization parameters.

External Points (sixth column).


To show and modify housekeeping (environmental) alarms.

2.2.1 Views menu introduction


This menu permits to navigate among the views and set some parameters, by
means of the following entries:

Backward:

Go back to the previous view.

Forward:

Go to the next view.

Equipment:
Open the Equipment view. The "Equipment" menu is then
available on the menu bar.

External Points:
Open the External Point view. The "External Point" menu is
then available on the menu bar.

Transmission:
Open the Transmission view. The "Transmission"
menu is then available on the menu bar.

Synchronization: Open the Synchronization view. The "Synchronization"


menu is then available on the menu bar

Refresh:
The aim of the refresh feature is to avoid a misalignment
between the CT and the managed NE. This misalignment is due to a loss of
notifications coming from the NE.

Open Object:
Navigate and show the contents of the selected
object: the current view change. It is equivalent to a double click on the
selected object in the view area.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

20 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Further access the Performance Monitoring and permits navigation to


the Board view.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Open in Window: Navigate and show the contents of the selected object.
The current view doesn't change but a new window with a new view is
opened.

Close:
Close the EML-USM view, without stopping the
supervision of the NE

2.2.2 Configuration menu introduction


This menu permits to set general configuration of the NE and to show or modify
some parameters, by means of the following entries:

Alarm Severities:

Manage the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile.

Set Alarm severities:


selected object

Set SdhNe Alarm severities: Send the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile
referred to the equipment level.

NE Time:

Performance:
Manage the Performance Monitoring domain. Used
to define the PM parameters, opening the following menu options:

Send the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile to the

Display and set the NE local time.

- Threshold table

Set ACD level:

Cross Connection Management: Manage the connection of the paths.

Loopback Management: Enter the loopback management. Used to


configure the loopback command for commissioning or maintenance
purposes.

Comm/Routing: Enter the Communication and Routing management. Used


to define the parameters for NE and OS in the TMN, opening the following
menu options:

Local configuration

OS Configuration

NTP Server Configuration

Interfaces Configuration

01
Edition
FCG - OND

See para.5.2.

LAPD Configuration

Ethernet Configuration

OSI Routing Configuration

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

21 of 308

RAP Configuration

MESA Configuration

IP Configuration
-

IP Static Routing Configuration

OSPF Area Configuration

- IP Address Configuration of point-to-point


interfaces

ISA board IP address.

Tunneling Configuration
-

OSI Over IP

IP over OSI

Overhead:
Handle the operation on the Overhead bytes. It is Used to
define the parameters in the following menu options:
-

OH Cross Connection

OH Phone Parameter

OH TP creation

OH TP deleting

Port Mode : It allows to set mode of Sdh/Pdh/Ethernet

ISA Port Configuration:


connections

Alarm Persistency Configuration: It allows to configure alarm persistence


parameters

It allows to create the TPs for the ATM/ISA/ETH

2.2.3 Diagnosis menu introduction


This menu permits to get information about the NE, by means of the following
entries:

Alarms: Display the Alarms Surveillance information of the NE. It opens the
following menu options:

01
Edition
FCG - OND

NE alarms

Object alarms

Subtree alarms

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

22 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Equipment alarms

Transmission alarms

External Points alarms

Performance data: Not operative It opens the following menu options:


-

15 Minutes

24 Hours

Log Browsing: Manage the events stored in the NE. It opens the following
menu options:
-

Alarm Log

Event Log

Software Trace Log

View Remote Inventory: Display the remote inventory data, previously stored
in the Craft Terminal by means the "upload remote inventory" performed in
the "Supervisory" menu.

Abnormal Condition list Display the list of the object class (Loopback) and
the name of the boards that are in abnormal condition.

2.2.4 Supervision menu introduction


This menu permits to set the supervision states of the NE, by means of the following
entries:

Access State: Manage the supervision access to the NE, with CT or OS. It
opens the following menu options:
-

OS

Requested

Alarms: Manage the alarms supervision of the NE. It opens the following
menu options:
-

Resynchronize.

Allow / Inhibits Notifs.

Upload Remote Inventory: Store the Remote Inventory data in the Craft
Terminal.

Set Manager list

Restart NE: Reset the NE software.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

23 of 308

Init download: Manage the software download, upgrading the NE.

Units info: Show the status of the software package installed in the NE
memory banks.

MIB management: Permits backup of NE software configuration and restore


of backupped file.

2.2.6 Equipment menu introduction


This menu permits to manage the NE as a whole, setting the boards that compose
it, by means of the following entries:

Set: Add or change the board type (a list is proposed).

Modify: Change the board type without previously remove it. It is only
possible between compatible board .

Remove: Remove the board.

Set in service: Insert a lock symbol in the board.

Set out of service Delete the lock symbol in the board, enabling changes.

Reset: Not operative.

Software description: Show information on the software of the board. Only


operative on ES1 board.

Remote Inventory: Show the Remote Inventory data inserted in the


equipment. It opens the following menu options:

Subrack level

Board level

ISA Board IP Address: Used to define the ISA board IP address


N.B. This option is available only at Subrack
view

Show supporting equipment: Navigate to the upper equipment level.

ISA navigate: Start the Specific Craft Terminal application for the ATM/IP
traffic management configuration. For details refer to the specific IP or ATM
Operator's Handbook. Not operative in current release.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

24 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

2.2.5 Download menu introduction


This menu permits to manage the NE software, by means of the following entries:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

2.2.7 Board menu introduction


This menu permits to show the physical port available in a specific board (alarm
synthesis and port symbol) and to access the port view, by means of the following
entries:

Port Access: Access the "Port view".

Change Physical Interface: Change the SPI or PPI object into PPI or SPI (and
vice versa) on the bi-mode port (140Mbit/s / STM-1 changeable). Not
operative in current release.

Show supporting equipment: Navigate to the upper Subrack level.

ISA Port Configuration: It allows creating the TPs for the ATM/ISA/ETH
connections.
N.B. This menu is available only if an
ATM/ISA/ETH board has been equipped in
the Subrack.

2.2.8 Port menu introduction


This menu permits to set and show the transmission resources (TP) referred to the
Port, by means of the entries indicated in the following list.
The menu differs according the port type (SDH, PDH, HOA, ATM, IP and ETHERNET).
The "Port view" is reached by means of the Equipment menu and Board view to
check the detailed alarms presented, but the available menu permits to configure
the port (many setting options listed in the port menu are common with the
"Transmission" view).
In these views are presented only the TP specific of the port.
It permits navigation to the Transmission view.

TP configuration: Set parameters for the Overhead (Signal Label and Path
Trace) on Synchronous TPs.

TP Threshold Configuration: Set B2 excessive BER ( Signal Degraded is only


operative on VC4 and MST ) parameter.

TP Frame Mode Configuration: Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G.703/704 or ISDNPRA management. Not operative in current release.

Set Retiming: Set the retiming feature applies to the outgoing 2Mbit/s. It
opens the following options:

01
Edition
FCG - OND

Enable

Disable

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

25 of 308

AU4 Concatenation: Only for SDH ports views. Not operative in current
release.

Cross Connection: Manage the connection of the paths. It opens the


following options:

Cross Connection Management

Create Cross Connection

Modify Cross Connection

Monitoring Operation: Set parameters for POM, SUT. Not available for PDH
port. 1642EMC R1.2 can support HPOM(not support SUT,TCM/T). It opens the
following menu options:
-

Creation / Deletion

Configuration

Performance: Set and show Performance Monitoring parameters and data.


It opens the following menu options:
-

Configure Monitoring

Display Current Data

Display History Data

Loopback: Enter the loopback management. Used to configure the


loopback command for commissioning or maintenance purposes:
-

Port Loopback Configuration

Loopback management

Physical Media: Manage the physical setting of the TP of the ports. Not
applicable to HOA port. It opens a menu which differs according the port
type:

SDH port:
-

Show Optical Configuration

TX Quality Configuration

Single Fibre Configuration

LAPD Configuration

Ms Configuration

PDH port: Not operative in current release.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

26 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Line Length Configuration

HDSL Configuration

NT G703/704 Configuration

NT X21 Configuration

ETHERNET port: Not operative in current release.


-

Remote Laser Management

Ethernet Port Configuration

ISA Port Configuration

Show supporting board: Navigate to the upper board level.

Navigate to Transmission view: permit to show a complete overview about


the signal flow, opening all TPs

Navigate to monitoring view: permit to show for a selected TP the related


POM/SUT/TCM and TCT object if present. 1642EMC R1.2 can support
HPOM(not support SUT,TCM/T)

2.2.9 Transmission menu introduction


This menu permits to show and set the Termination Point of the equipment, thus
having an overview of the complete signal flow of the various ports.
The menu permits to define all the Cross Connections and manages the
transmission resources, setting the relevant configuration.
Further access the Performance Monitoring and manage Multiplex Section
Protections and Loopback functions.
It permits navigation to the Port view.
The menu lists the following entries:

Add TP: Search and add TP to the transmission view, than presented in the
screen.

Expand: Display the TPs related to a selected TP. It opens the following menu
options:

01
Edition
FCG - OND

Next level of lower TP

All lower TP

Next level of upper TP

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

27 of 308

All upper TP

Hide: Remove the TP from the screen of the Transmission view. It opens the
following menu options:
-

Lower TP

Upper TP

Selected TP

TP configuration: Set parameters for the Signal Label and Path trace.

TP Frame Mode Configuration: Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G.703/704 or ISDNPRA management. Only for PDH ports views. Not operative in current
release.

TP Threshold configuration: Set B2 Ex BER ( Signal Degrade is only operative


on VC4 and MST ) threshold.

Terminate TP: Terminate the AU4-CTP paths. Not operative in current release.

Disterminate TP: Disterminate the AU4-CTP paths. Not operative in current


release.

AU4 Concatenation: Only for SDH ports views. Not operative in current
release.

Cross Connection: Manage the connection of the paths. It opens the


following menu options:

Cross Connection Management

Create Cross Connection

Modify Cross Connection

Port Switch Over. Not operative in current release.

Show Cross Connected TPs

Monitoring Operation: Set parameters for POM, SUT. It opens the following
menu options: (1642EMC R1.2 can support HPOM but not support SUT,TCM/T)
-

Creation / deletion

Configuration

Performance: Set and show Performance Monitoring parameters and data.


It opens the following menu options:
-

01
Edition
FCG - OND

Configure Monitoring

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

28 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Display Current Data

Display History Data

Structure TPs: Define the structure of a selected TP (TU2, TU3, TU12, VC3/VC4,
VC12)

Loopback: Enter the loopback management. Used to configure the


loopback command for commissioning or maintenance purposes: It opens
the following menu options:

Port Loopback Configuration

Loopback management

Physical Media: Manage the TP physical setting. It opens the following menu
options:
-

Als Management

Show Optical Configuration

TX Quality Configuration

Single Fibre Configuration

Extra traffic. Not operative in current release.

Multiplex Section management

Line Length Configuration. Not operative in current release.

Set Domain

HDSL Configuration. Not operative in current release.

NT Configuration. Not operative in current release.

X21 Configuration. Not operative in current release.

Show supported board: Navigate to the board supporting the selected TP

Navigate to Port view: Navigate to the port supporting the selected TP

2.2.10 Synchronization menu introduction


This menu permits to set and show the Synchronization parameters and status,
setting the relevant configuration, by means of the following entries:

Timing Source Configuration: Set timing source priority and quality for the
selected input reference.

Protection Command: Manage commands (force, manual, lockout) for the


selected timing reference.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

29 of 308

T0 Configuration: Enable/disable SSM and WTR on the T0 synchronization


source.

T4 Configuration: Enable/disable SSM, WTR and Squelch Criteria on the T4


synchronization source.

T0 TEST Configuration: Not used.

SSU Configuration: Set NE single or with SSU.

Remove Timing Reference

Change T4<->T5: Change the synchronization physical interface from 2MHz


(T4) to 2Mbit/s (T5) without traffic and vice-versa. Not operative in current
release.

Change 2MHz->2Mbit: Change the source of a protection unit from 2Mhz to


2Mbit and vice versa. Not operative in current release.

Set T0 Equal T4

Remove T0 Equal T4

Transmitted SSM Quality Configuration: Set SSM quality transmitted on the


selected T1 SDH timing reference.

Frame Mode Configuration: Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G.703/704 or ISDNPRA management. Only for PDH ports views. Not operative in current
release.

Show Timing Source: Show the "port view" related to the selected timing
reference.

2.2.11 External Points menu introduction


This menu permits to display and set the input/output environmental alarm
(housekeeping alarm), by means of the following entries:

Configuration: Set the input/output environmental alarm.

Display: Show the list of the input/output environmental alarm. It opens the
following menu options:

01
Edition
FCG - OND

Show external Input Points

Show external Output Points

Show all external Points

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

30 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 2 Menu options flow chart -- 1

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK

3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

31 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 3 Menu options flow chart 2

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK

3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

32 of 308
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 4 Menu options flow chart 3

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK

3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

33 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 5 Menu options flow chart 4

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK

3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

34 of 308
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 6 Menu options flow chart 5

2.3 Advices on Navigation principles


Navigation rules are the same for all the NE using the same Craft Terminal Info
Model.
This general rules are described in the "Basic Craft Terminal Operator Handbook".
In this paragraphs are instead inserted menu options typical for this Ne involved in
Navigation and example of Navigation.
To reach a particular view of the NE there are several ways (navigation is also
possible mixing the different ways):

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

35 of 308

Double click on the selected object

Select the object and use the Open object or Open in Window option of the
View pull down menu

Use the Menu option tree structure. The View pull down menu permits to
show the following menus:
-

Equipment

Transmission

Synchronization

External Points

The menu structure permits to open the same window following several menu
paths.
EXAMPLE: to obtain the "Create Cross Connection" window:

First navigation path:


Open View - Transmission pull down menu

Open Transmission - Cross Connection - Cross Connection Management pull


down menu
Select Create option in the presented window

Second navigation path:


Open View - Equipment pull down menu
Double click on Board
Select the Board to access the Board view
Open Board - Port Access pull down menu
Open Port - Cross Connection - Create Cross Connection pull down menu

Third navigation path:


Open Configuration - Cross Connection Management pull down menu
Select Create option in the presented window

The menu structure also permits to pass from a view menu to another (i.e. from
"port view" to "board view" or to "transmission view") thus facilitating the operators
activity.
Views Navigation

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

36 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The first level of the "Equipment view" representation will be displayed directly into
the current window, immediately after the NE login.
The Equipment view enables a fast navigation through all levels of the equipment
hierarchy.
Navigation is done from higher to lower levels. The NE hierarchy is generally
organized in the following way:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Subrack > board > port > TP.


Double clicking on the objects performs the navigation through different levels of
the NE hierarchy:

The first level shows the Subrack level of the Equipment view

By double clicking on a board body, the board level of the Equipment view
can be reached.

Further, by double clicking on a port body contained in the board, the port
level of the Equipment view can be reached. The port view displays the
inner TPs.

It is possible to go back to the upper level of representation by pressing the


<ESC> key on the keyboard;
It is also possible to:
-

- Go back to the previous view, by selecting the Backward option


from the views menu

- Go to the next view, by selecting the Forward option from the view
menu.

N.B. Selecting in the first level of the Equipment view the Show supporting
equipment option from the Equipment menu, the Rack level view (Example) is
presented.
In the Rack Level view one Subrack is presented:
- The 1642EMC subrack, named SR42C (Example)
Further, selecting in the Rack level view the Show supporting
equipment option from the Equipment menu, the Equipment level
view is presented.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

37 of 308

3. NE MANAGEMENT SUPERVISION
This chapter is dedicated to the NE states and NE access.

The elementary building blocks of any telecommunication network are the


Network Elements (NEs).
Operating with the Craft Terminal the NE can present different management
states according to the condition of the connection (supervision, local access,
connection state, etc). Also general Alarm status is presented.
Management states are present at Network Element Synthesis view level and at
USM--EML view level.
All the information referred to the management states are inserted in the Basic
Craft Terminal Operators Handbook.
Any disruption in the communication link between the CT and the NE results in an
update of the management states when the CT has detected the communication
failure.
3.2 NE supervision and login
The Network Element Synthesis views enable you to get access to the current NE
EML-USM view described in this handbook.
The Network Element Synthesis views enable you to work on local or remote NE,
selecting it and activating "Supervision" and "Login", as described in the Basic Craft
Terminal Operator's Handbook.
The EML-USM Main view is presented as for the following figure.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

38 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

3.1 NE management states

Figure 7 NE EML-USM Main view.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK

3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

39 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

4. NE MANAGEMENT GENERAL CONFIGURATION


In this chapter general configuration referred to the equipment management are
described (Craft Terminal access, NE Time, Alarms configuration, etc).

The NE can be managed by the OS or by the Craft Terminal. To control the


competition of the OS and the CT, a Local Access Control (LAC) is available.
If the LAC is "granted" that means the CT is allowed to manage the NE. In the view
the icon with a key symbol has a rectangular shape.
If the LAC is "access denied" that means the OS manages the NE and the CT is not
allowed to modify NE configuration (it can only "read"). In the view the icon with a
key symbol has a circular shape.

If the LAC is "requested" that means the CT has requested permission from the OS
and is waiting for a replay.
However the OS does continue to provide a certain number of services. These
services includes:

Reception and processing of alarms,

Performance processing on TPs,

Switching back to the OS access state.

The access state of an NE can be modified from two types of views:


4.1.1 Switching from the OS to the Craft Terminal access state
Select the Supervision pull down menu. Then select the Requested option
from the Access State cascading menu as shown in the following figure.

Figure 8 NE management: setting the access state.


01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

40 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

4.1 Access state (allow or inhibit NE Craft access)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel
the "Craft access" operation using the Yes or No push buttons. The request is
up to the OS that accept or refuse it.
If the OS doesn't answer in a predefined time it is assumed that the NE is in
the Craft access state and can be managed from a Craft Terminal.
4.1.2 Switching from the Craft Terminal access state back to the OS access state
Select the Supervision pull down menu. Then select the OS... option from the
Access State.
From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel
the "OS access" operation.
The NE is now managed by the OS.
N.B. The key symbol icon on the management states of the NE view indicates
whether the NE is managed by a craft terminal or by the OS.
N.B. Local Craft Terminal access is denied on recovery phase after a loss of
communication of the NE. When communication is lost with the NE, the OS
automatically recovers the communication and put the state that was set before
the loss of communication (therefore the Craft Terminal access can be denied or
granted).
4.2 NE Time management

The NE local time of a selected NE can be visualized and/or re-aligned on the OS


time basis.

In this view the OS indication identifies the Craft Terminal.


The status of the Network Time Protocol can be checked
Select the NE Time... option from the Configuration pull down menu.

Figure 9 Consulting and/or setting the local NE time.


The following dialogue box is opened from which you can get and/or set the local
NE time and check the NTP Status.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

41 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 10 NE Time dialogue box.

The following fields are available:

NTP Status section (read only) with the following parameters:


NTP protocol
It can be enabled (in the NTP Server Configuration) or disabled or
empty (greyed).
NTP Main and NTP Spare
It displays the status of the Main and Spare NTP: reachable or
unreachable.

Time section with the following data:


NE Time and OS Time
It displays (read only) the time of the Network Element and of the OS
(Craft Terminal).
Set NE Time With OS Time
It permits to align the NE time with the time of the Craft Terminal.

Two different operative conditions can be defined:


01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

42 of 308

NTP protocol enabled


In this case, NTP Main and NTP Spare will be reachable or unreachable.
When both are reachable the NE uses the Main.
The Set NE Time With OS Time message is not operative and the user cannot
set manually the NE Time.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

NTP protocol disabled

In this case, the NTP Main and NTP Spare are empty (greyed); the Set NE
Time With OS Time message is operative and the user can set manually the
NE Time (i.e. change the NE time with the Time of the Craft Terminal).
If you do not want to set the NE local time, click on the Close push button to close
the dialogue box.

To re-align the NE time on the OS time basis click in the Set NE Time
With OS Time radio button and either click on the Apply push button to
validate or on the Close push button to cancel and close the dialogue
box. The OS time comes from the PC date configuration that
corresponds to the legal GMT time.
N.B. When the NTP is not present, the OS system re-aligns the time of all
supervised NEs periodically and automatically with a configured
periodicity. This periodicity is common for all the NEs.
If you set the NE time, you will force the change, with an immediate
effect on the NE. However it will not have any effect on the periodic
and automatic mechanism.
4.3 Alarm Configuration
The operations described in this chapter, mainly related to alarm setting, are:

Alarm Severity Assignment Profile management,

Allow/Inhibit alarm notification,

Alarm re-synchronization

4.3.1 Procedure to modify an ASAP


a) Select the TP (or board/port/etc)whose ASAP is to be changed
b) From the menu click on Configuration -> alarms Severities.
c) Select one of the user profile (#10001 or #10002) and click on Modify
d) Click on the Probable Cause Families associated to the alarm
e) Select the relevant alarm in the list of Probable Cause Name
f) In the Service affecting/non-affecting fields select the needed severity
(critical/major/minor)
g) Click on OK
h) Click on Close
i) Select the relevant TP and then Configuration -> Set Alarms Severities
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

43 of 308

j) In the box that appears select the just modified ASAP (eventually check it by
means of Detail)
k) Click on OK
4.3.2 Alarm Severity Assignment Profile Management (ASAP)
Managed entities yield alarms when they malfunction. This section deals with the
configuration of ASAPs. An ASAP is a list of Alarm probable causes to which
Severities Profiles are assigned, predefined or settable by the operator.

The Probable Cause of the alarm,

The Severity of the alarm.

The Alarm Type (communication alarm, equipment alarm).

4.3.2.1 Alarm Severities

This option permits to configure and display the ASAP.


Select the Alarm Severities... option from the Configuration pull down
menu.

Figure 11 Configuring Alarm Severity Assignment Profile.


The ASAP Management dialogue box is displayed.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

44 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Three important notions are:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 12 ASAPs Management dialogue box.

The presented default profiles are:

Profile No alarms. With this profile all the alarms are enabled (only Sfwr
Download Failure is not alarmed). This ASAP enables the emission of all
alarms.

Profile No Remote Alarms shows the alarm criterion configuration defined


for "path alarms" (only AIS and RDI and Sfwr Download Failure are not
alarmed). This ASAP enables the emission of all:

- Communication Alarms (i.e. the AIS & RDI alarms are not alarmed)

- Equipment alarms

Environmental

Error Processing (i.e. Sfwr Download Failure is not alarmed)

Profile Primary alarms With this profile the AIS, Battery Degraded, Sfwr
Download Failure, SSF and RDI alarms are not alarmed. This ASAP enables
the emission of all:
-

- Communication Alarms (i.e. the AIS, SSF & RDI alarms are not alarmed)

- Equipment alarms

01
Edition
FCG - OND

Environmental
1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK
3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

45 of 308

Error Processing (i.e. Sfwr Download Failure is not alarmed)

Profile All Alarms (i.e. all alarms disabled). This ASAP inhibits the emission of
any potential alarm.

Profile 10001 can be set by the user. Each single alarm can be classified with
a criterion selected by the operator. A default standard configuration is set.
(Battery Degraded, Battery Failure, Communication Subsystem Failure, Path
Trace Mismatch are not alarmed).
NOTE: if this profile is not already present in the list, it is necessary to
create it, selecting one existing profile and then clicking on the Clone
button.

You can select an ASAP.


For ASAP "10001" it is then possible to choose Detail, Modify, Clone or Delete
buttons.
For ASAP No Alarms, Primary alarms . No Remote Alarms and All Alarms it is
only possible to choose Detail, or Clone buttons.
Clone selection can be used to create new ASAP.
Click on Detail, Modify, or Clone button, the ASAP edition dialogue box is
displayed.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

46 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 13 ASAP Edition dialogue box.


The alarm severity assignment profile dialogue box displays a list of probable
causes and a list of alarm severity.
The Probable cause family check-buttons allows filtering the probable causes that
will appear in the Probable cause name list. NOTE: it is necessary to choose one or
more of these filters to have the list.
To find a particular probable cause, enter its name in the Search entry box at the
bottom.
ASAPs are already defined in the system with default values for the assigned
severities.
You can modify the severity associated with each probable cause. To do this,
select the probable cause whose severity level you wish to modify.
Then click on the option button: Service Affecting (not protected probable cause),
and then Non Service Affecting (protected probable cause, not operative in
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

47 of 308

current release ) and then Service Independent (don't used, it is not operative). For
each the severity can be chosen from "Critical", "Major", "Minor", "Warning", "Nonalarmed" or "Not used". A "Non-alarm" probable cause corresponds to no alarm
emitted for this probable cause.

When you have finished configuring ASAP, press the OK button to confirm the
settings and close the dialogue box or the Cancel push button to cancel the new
settings and close the dialogue box.
When Clone an ASAP the created one is identified with next number (10002...).
The max number of ASAP is six.
N.B. The number of severities and the number of probable causes is fixed. The
ASAP function only enables the modification of the severities assigned to the
probable causes, it does not allow the addition, removal or modification of these
severities and causes.
N.B. To take into account a profile modification, it is mandatory to perform a resynchronization of the alarms. During this re-synchronization, the severity of each
alarm is updated. Otherwise, the severities are updated only when the modified or
new alarms are emitted by the NE.
4.3.2.2 Set Alarm Severities
To assign an alarm severity to a TP or equipment, select the TP or equipment in the
related view and then select the Set Alarm Severities... option from the
Configuration pull down menu.
The Set ASAP dialog opens.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

48 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

When selecting Details the assigned severity are only shown and it isn't possible to
modify.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 14 Set ASAP dialogue box.


Within the "Apply to" section on the right side, the user specifies the objects (TP or
equipment) the ASAP selected in the List of ASAPs (new ASAP) should be applied
to:
Choose Scope

Selected object only


The new ASAP is only applied to the object currently selected in the
view
This is the default if an object is selected in the view.

Network element
The new ASAP is applied to all objects of the NE matching criteria
specified in "Choose Classes" and "Choose current ASAP".
Since this application process takes some time, its progress is shown in
the section "Execution Monitoring".
This is the default if no object is selected in the view.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

49 of 308

Selected object and subordinates


The new ASAP is applied to the selected object and those of this
subordinates matching the criteria specified in "Choose Classes" and
"Choose current ASAP".
Since this application process takes some time, its progress is shown in
the Section "Execution Monitoring".

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

N.B. Due to system architecture, AU-4CTPs are no subordinates


of MSTTPs. Therefore, if the AU-4 CTP should be included as
subordinate, select the related OSTTP (OpS) or ESTTP (EIS) as main
object.
Choose Class (es)
Enabled if one the scopes "Network Element" or "Selected object and
subordinates" is selected.

All classes (es)

Specific class (es)


Select one or more object classes the new ASAP shall be applied to.

Choose current ASAP


The new ASAP is only applied to objects, which are currently assigned to the ASAP.
Execution Monitoring
Continuously shows the number of modified objects during the ASAP application
process if one of the scopes "Network element" or "Selected object and
subordinates" is chosen.
Press Ok to confirm the ASAP assignment and close the dialog. Press Close to close
the dialog and discard any changes.
4.3.3 Set SdhNe Alarms Severities
Selecting the Set SdhNe Alarms Severities option from the Configuration pull down
menu only the alarms at Equipment level (FF, BKF, SHD and ABF) are managed.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

50 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 15 Set SdhNe Alarms Severities


If an object was selected in a view before opening this dialog, its ASAP is
highlighted in the list. Using the Detail button or double-clicking on a list item opens
the ASAP Edition dialog, which displays detailed information on this ASAP.
Press Ok to confirm the ASAP assignment and close the dialog. Press Close the
dialog and discard any changes.
4.3.4 Allow/Inhibit Alarms Notifications
The system provides the possibility to allow/inhibit the spontaneous incoming alarm
notifications.
a) To inhibit alarm notification, select the Supervision pull down menu. You can
then select the Inhibit Notifs option from the Alarms pull down menu as shown in
the following figure.

Figure 16 Inhibit alarm notification

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

51 of 308

From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the
operation using the Ok or Cancel push buttons respectively.
To inform the operator that alarms have been inhibited, the labels of the alarm
panel are greyed out.

N.B. Inhibiting the alarms notification means that they are not forwarded to the CT
but alarms are still generated by the NE.
b) To allow alarm notification
Select the Supervision pull down menu. You can then select the Allow Notifs option
from the Alarms pull down menu as shown in the following figure.

Figure 18 Allow alarm notifications


From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the
operation using the Ok or Cancel push buttons respectively.
4.3.5 Alarms resynchronization
The system provides the possibility to recover alarms present on the NE and to
update the current problem list of the NE. After this operation CT and NE current
alarms are consistent.
To re--synchronize the alarms, select the Supervision pull down menu. You can
then select the Resynchronize option from the Alarms pull down menu as shown in
the following figure.

Figure 19 Alarm re--synchronization


01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

52 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 17 Inhibit alarm notification

From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the
operation using the Ok or Cancel push buttons respectively.
N.B. This functionality has to be used only if there is any perturbation. Never use this
operation during a correct behaviour.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

4.4 Restart NE
The restart operation is a software reset and can be executed in normal traffic
conditions.
The restart operation in any case activates the Commit (active) version.
Select the Restart NE option from the Supervision cascading menu.
The following dialogue box is opened.

Figure 20 Restart NE confirmation


Click on the Cancel push button to abort the restart NE.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

53 of 308

5. SECURITY MANAGEMENT
In this chapter are inserted setting options referred to the SECurity management:

This option is referred to the SECurity management and allows the user to set the
Manager list and the Access Control Domain of the NE.
Select the Set Manager list option from the Supervision pull down menu.
The dialog-box contains the following fields:

Manager list: each connected manager to the NE is highlighted in the list.


The user can set a manager clicking on the denomination.
Several managers can be enabled contemporaneously, having in charge
the NE.
The Manager List contains the list of managers (i.e. RM, SY, NPOS, EML) that
work on the NE. The EML-USM administrator (SH or Craft Terminal) should set
the Manager List only to remove a manager in case of emergency (i.e. the
Manager misses the NE connection).

NE Domain field allow selecting the domain among that displayed in the list,
assigning it to the NE.

The different domains could be assigned to different operators.


OK button is used to validate the selection.
Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data.
Help button provides some useful information about the dialog.

Figure 21 Set Manager list

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

54 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

5.1 Set Manager list

5.2 Set ACD level

This option allows the user to select the level of the Access Control Domain.
The ACD manage the concurrence of access among several different managers
(i.e. RM and EML).
This only acts on the functions that can be used by different manager.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Select the Set ACD level option from the Configuration pull down menu.
The dialog-box contains the following fields:

Current ACD level


Show the Access Control Domain level currently set.

The Access Control Domain check level


Permit to set one of two level checks. By the way, this is an operation that
should be performed only during the EML-USM installation phase:

NE level, the ACD is performed on all the NEs

No Check, the ACD is not managed

The default value is NE level. If it is changed, it is necessary to restart the EMLUSM.


OK button is used to validate the selection.
Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.

Figure 22 Set ACD level

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

55 of 308

This chapter describes how to display and set the input/output environmental
alarm (housekeeping alarm),
An external input point is an environmental alarm (also called housekeeping
alarm). It corresponds to an external event, which is monitored by the NE. A
number of relays on the NE are dedicated to check modification of the
environment as for example a fire, a flood...
An external output point is used to manage a NE contact (i.e. relay) connected to
detector. An external output point is independent from external input point.
The operations that can be undertaken in this section are:
-- Displaying external points,
-- Expanding or reducing external points list,
-- Configuring input and output external points.
6.1 Displaying external points

Select the External Points option from the Views pull down menu.

Figure 23 Opening the external points view.


After selecting this menu option the external points view is displayed into the
current window instead of the current view.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

56 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

6. EXTERNAL INPUT AND OUTPUT POINTS MANAGEMENT

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 24 External points view.


The external points view displays a list of all input and output points.
The following information is given for each external point:

The external point type: Input or Output.

The user label: a user-friendly label associated to the configurable external


point (see further the paragraph External points configuration).

The external state: represents the alarm state. "On" when the alarm is raised,
else "Off". If the external point is active (On), a little flag is represented near
the status of the concerned point.

Only for the Output external point there is the following information:
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

57 of 308

The Output criteria: if configured, display the alarm event and the board
effected associated to the Output point (see further the paragraph External
points configuration)

6.1.1 Expanding or reducing external points list


The external points view displays a complete list of the external points but it can
also be restricted to the input or to the output points.
To see either the input points, the output points or all the external points, select the
appropriate option from the External Points pull down menu as shown in the
following figure.

Figure 25 Expanding or reducing the external points list.

6.2 External points configuration

The configuration operations available on external points are:

"User labels" configuration

"External state". Can be set for output points (ON or OFF)

"Output criteria" associated to the External output point

To configure an external point, click on the concerned row of Figure 24. And then
select the Configuration option from the External Points pull down menu as shown
in the following figure.

Figure 26 Configuring external points.


The following dialogue box is then opened, displaying information about the
selected external point (Input or Output).

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

58 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 27 External input point configuration dialogue box.

Figure 28 External output point configuration dialogue box (MANUAL)

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

59 of 308

Opening the dialog the current state of the selected External Point is shown.
[1] External Input Point Configuration

User Label: this field can be filled by the user with a Label that indicate the
associated event that must be taken under check (for example presences
of water or fire in the room where the Equipment is placed)

External State: this field is set to off and can't be changed by the operator

Probable Cause: the field is set to housekeeping and can't be changed by


the operator

[2] External Output Point Configuration

User Label: this field can be filled by the user with a Label that indicate the
alarm detected or the action that must be executed if a specific event
occur (for example a "Pump" activation when water is present in the room
where the equipment is placed).

External State: can be set to "on" (alarm) or "off" (non alarm) only if "Manual"
option has been selected in the "Output Criteria" field.

Output Criteria can be configured as:

- Manual (forced). The output contact is set in a fixed way, not


depending on a particular event.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

60 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 29 External output point configuration dialogue box (FLEXIBLE)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

For example the output contact could be used to "Manually" activate a


pump drain water from the room where the equipment is placed; in this
case is also necessary to set the option "On" in the field "External State".

- Flexible. It is possible to define from CT the couple event/CPO#,


where the event is chosen between a set of Output Criteria (LOS, RDI and
LOF) and specifies the STM-N interface which the Output Criteria refers to
by clicking on Choose button; subsequently the TP search dialog box will
be opened.
When the configuration of the external point is completed, click on the OK push
button to validate the choice and close the dialogue box. The Cancel push
button cancels the configuration and closes the dialogue box.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

61 of 308

DIAGNOSIS MANAGEMENT

Alarms are always present on the operator's workspace. The different types of
alarms, their number and their severity level, are represented in all Equipment
views (NE views, Board views and Port views). An icon representation is used, which
change colour when the relevant alarm is active. Thus, at all times, you know the
number of alarms and their severity relating to the equipment.
Access to the Alarm Surveillance to show the alarm condition is detailed in the
following paragraph.
Then is presented the abnormal condition list (as result of operator's command
such us loop, laser forced on etc.).
At the end the Event log access is introduced.
Information about the significance of equipment alarms and status is given in the
Maintenance section.
7.1 Alarms surveillance
In this chapter is described the access to the Alarm Surveillance information of the
NE.
It is possible to show all the Alarms or filter the alarms report.
Select the Diagnosis pull down menu. You can then select the following option
from the Alarms pull down menu:

NE Alarms: all the NE alarms are listed in the Alarm Surveillance report which
is activated

Object Alarms: only the alarms of the selected object are listed in the Alarm
Surveillance Report

Subtree Alarm: only the alarms of the selected object and of the relevant
Subtree are listed in the Alarm Surveillance report

Equipment Alarms: only the alarms of the equipment management are listed
in the Alarm Surveillance report

Transmission Alarms: only the alarms of the transmission management are


listed in the Alarm Surveillance report

External Points Alarms: only the alarms of the input external point
management are listed in the Alarm Surveillance report

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

62 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

7.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 30 Alarm Surveillance


Selecting any of the previously seen options, the Alarm surveillance report is
displayed as for the example of the following figure.
This view shows first a synthesis of the NE alarms (Counter Summary) with the sum of
all alarms, then a detailed list of alarms of the selected filter (Alarms Sub list).

Figure 31 Alarm Surveillance


Detailed information for each alarm is supplied.
For example: the board in which the alarm is detected, the status of the alarm, the
alarm type, and the probable cause.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

63 of 308

The information supplied helps the operator, typically during troubleshooting


operation, presented in next section. (Maintenance section, where more details
about alarms are given).
Detailed description is given in the AS Operator's Handbook.

The abnormal condition provides the synthesis of NE "not normal conditions" listing
the events that contribute to abnormal condition. Select Diagnosis->Abnormal
Condition List.

Figure 32 Abnormal condition menu option

Figure 33 Example of abnormal condition list


The abnormal conditions are the following:

Loopback

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

64 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

7.2 Abnormal Condition List

Protection units (in case of SNCP if supported) are in lockout or in forced


status

Board (or sub-board) is placed in a not configured slot

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Select an abnormal condition and click on OK to open the relative dialog


window. Figure 34 is opened.

Figure 34 Example of loopback dialog window management


The other abnormal condition types will open the corresponding management
window or will open the window to navigate towards the management window.

7.3 Log Browsing


From the Network Element context views, perform the following operations to have
access to the Event Log file:
-

In the Diagnosis pull-down menu, select the Log Browsing option.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

65 of 308

The Proposed option:

Select the Alarm Log option (Log Id # 1) to access the Event Log file.
The Configuration and Log Browsing ELM Windows open, permitting to
analyze all alarms stored in the NE.
Refer to the "EML Operator's Handbook"

Select the Event Log option (Log Id # 2) to access the Event Log file.
The Configuration and Log Browsing ELM Windows open, permitting to
analyze all events stored in the NE.
Refer to the "ELM Operator's Handbook"

Software Trace Log option is reserved to Alcatel personnel only.

7.4 Remote Inventory


This paragraph describes the access to the remote inventory of this NE.
In the Remote Inventory are stored information of identification, construction data
etc.
The options used are:

Upload Remote Inventory: store the Remote Inventory data in the Craft
Terminal.

View Remote Inventory: display the remote inventory data, previously stored
in the Craft Terminal by means the "upload remote inventory" performed in
the "Supervision" menu.

Remote Inventory option of the Equipment.


7.4.1 Upload remote Inventory
This command stores the Remote Inventory data in the Craft Terminal.
Select the Upload Remote Inventory option of the Supervision pull down menu.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

66 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 35 Log Browsing option in Network Element context view

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 36 Upload Remote Inventory Menu


A confirmation dialog box is opened.

Figure 37 Remote Inventory confirmation request


Clicking on OK after a while an information dialog box is presented.

Figure 38 Remote Inventory completed

7.4.2 View Remote Inventory


This command displays the remote inventory previously stored in the Craft Terminal
by means the Upload remote inventory.
Select the View Remote Inventory option of the Diagnosis pull down menu.
The Remote inventory data appears.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

67 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 39 View Remote Inventory


Data is displayed in specific fields:

Company

It indicates the Company (Alcatel branch), which designs the unit.


Refer to Alcatel for the abbreviation's meaning (four characters).

Unit Type

It indicates the units' acronym

Unit Part Number

It indicates Alcatel or Factory product's Part No.. The number indicated is that
printed on the labels or on the units' front cover plate.

Software Part Number

It indicates the ID of the unit's resident software

CLEI Code

It indicates the CLEI code according to Bellecore specs. TR-ISD-325

Manufacturing plant

It indicates the Company's manufacturing plant ID within the company, producing


the unit.
Refer to Alcatel for the abbreviation's meaning (four characters).

Serial Number

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

68 of 308

It indicates the product's serial number as specified by the NR 130 Norm.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Date identifier

It indicates the meaning of the date that follows.


It is a two-digit code supplying the following information:
00 date of construction at the time of final testing
01 production order data
02 construction date of the unit lot
03 date product has been forwarded to customer
04 customer order date

Date (YYMMDD)

The identification of the date depends on the indications stated in the previous
field. When only the year is displayed, the format must be "YY- - - - "

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

69 of 308

8. COMMUNICATION AND ROUTING MANAGEMENT


8.1 Overview on Communication and Routing Domain

8.1.1 OSI Protocol on QB3/Qecc


A brief description of basic concepts and terms involved in the communication
and routing domain follows.
During the TMN design process, a network is partitioned into domains; each
domain can consist of a collection of two types of nodes:

Nodes supporting a link state routing protocol IS-IS; these nodes will be
called adaptive routers; IS-IS protocol floods the network with link state
information in order to build a complete consistent picture of the network
topology. Use of IS-IS routing protocol in a TMN facilitates installation and
operation due to the "self learning" capabilities of these protocols and
automatic network reconfiguration in case of failure; moreover the use of
these standardized routing protocols guarantees interoperability in a multivendor environment.

Nodes not supporting these protocols; these nodes will be called static
routers;

Networks partitions consisting of the former type of node will be called adaptive
routing domains; networks partitions consisting of the later type of node will be
called static routing domains.
Moreover, a node which have to take routing decisions must became
Intermediate Systems, all others can be made End Systems
For the description of the following paragraphs use is made of Figure 38. It is not a
network-planning example; it is only used to describe L1, L2, RAP and MESA.
8.1.1.1 Partitioning into Routing Sub domains
In order to reduce the overhead associated with distributed adaptive routing, it
may be useful to divide an adaptive routing domain into smaller routing sub
domains, called areas or level 1 sub domain. A level 1 sub domain should fulfil the
following requirements:

A level 1 sub domain should form a connected sub network; this sub network
should have only a few links to the outside world, compared with the
number of internal links;

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

70 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The purpose of the communication and routing domain is to define configuration


parameters concerning the communication protocols for the local NE, the OS and
each other related NE in order to provide a global communication capabilities
inside the network.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Each node must belong to exactly one level 1 sub domain;

Each node which is connected to a foreign level 1 sub domain must


become a level 2 intermediate system; level 1 intermediate systems know
how to communicate only with IS in the same area; obviously, there must be
at least one level 2 intermediate system per level 1 sub domain;

Level 2 intermediate systems must form a connected network, because level


1 path cannot be utilized for level 2 communications. This network will be
called level 2 backbones.

In the simplest case, all nodes within a level 1 sub domain share the same area
address.
In general it is allowed to have multiple synonymous area addresses within a level
1 sub domain even if the usage of this features should be checked with Alcatel
engineers.
The synonymous list is used to ease partitioning in the future. There is a basic rule,
which must be followed by two neighboring level 1 intermediate systems within a
sub domain: there must be at least one area address in common between their
two synonymous list, otherwise they are not able to communicate with each other.
8.1.1.2 Partitioning into separate Routing Domains
In certain situations it may be necessary to partition a given network into separate
routing domains, where no routing information is exchanged between these
domains. The major benefits of this partitioning are reduction of memory,
processing and traffic overhead, because there is no exchange of routing
information between the domains. Communication between separate routing
domains must be achieved through the use of Reachable Address Prefixes (RAP).
A Reachable Address Prefixes represents static routing information. It can only be
associated with a link of level 2 intermediate systems, whereby this link crosses
routing domain boundaries. A Reachable Address Prefixes is handled in the same
way as information about a foreign level 1 sub domain within the own domain. The
Reachable Address Prefixes indicates that any packet whose destination network
addresses NSAP matches the prefix may be forwarded via the link with which the
prefix is associated.
For example, consider network, which is split into two separate routing domains:

Routing domain A resides in a level 1 sub domain with area address "a"

Routing domain B resides in a level 1 sub domain with area address "b"

In order to enable the communication, the Reachable Address Prefixes in routing


domain A must contain the area address "b" and the Reachable Address Prefixes
in routing domain B must contain the area address "a".
On the other hand, within a given level 1 sub domain, there can be some NEs
neither supporting IS-IS nor ES-IS protocol (static routing). In such condition, the
communication can be achieved through the use of Manual End System
Adjacencies (MESA).
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

71 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

A prerequisite for the use of manual end system adjacencies is that the area
addresses of the connected nodes must be the same; as a consequence the
nodes must belong to the same level 1 sub domain. Within a pure Alcatel network
there is no need to use any kind of static routing. Therefore normally RAP and MESA
shall never be used.

Figure 40 Routing subdomain organization example

8.1.2 IP over OSI tunnelling for ATM/IP


This feature is applicable to NEs with ATM/IP board.
It permits to manageATM/IP traffic encapsulating SNMP messages of the TCP/IP
protocols over the OSI stack using CLNP/LAPD/ECC protocols.
It consists in using QB3/QECC channels to carry IP link terminated on ATM/IP board
(end-node). The extraction/insertion of IP packets from QB3/QECC channels is
performed by EC.
8.1.3 OSI over IP tunnelling on QB3
This feature (not operative in current release) allows the Element Manager to
reach the GNEs (and all the relevant NEs behind them) by using networking.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

72 of 308

This would permit to use an external DCN based on IP only. Hence, no OSI
networking would be required on the external DCN.
OSI over IP technique is used to meet the target. OSI packets leaving the SH are
encapsulated into IP packets within the SH system itself. Hence, packets leaving
the SH are IP packets, containing the original OSI packet.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Once the packet get the NE through a pure IP network, the GNE has to strip off the
IP encapsulation, extracting the OSI packet, and to route the OSI packet as it does
today using a pure OSI networking.
Hence, the internal networking of the SDH network (DCCs) is still based on OSI. No
IP packets shall flow inside DCCs, because the GNE receives the IP packet
containing the OSI packet, deletes the IP header, and forwards only the OSI
packet on DCCs.
The default OSI lower layers networking can be replaced by IP routing capability
at the bottom of the QB3/QECC communication protocol suite; the choice is
software switch-able at NE level. The implementation adopts the RFC1006
standard to put the OSI upper layers on top of IP networking.
The application goal is to offer the TCP/IP transport (i.e. Internet compatibility) in
alternative to the full ISO/OSI communication protocols, in the complete DCN
network or at least in a consistent portion of it.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

73 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 41 OSI over IP tunnelling on QB3

8.2 Communication and routing views


To access, select Comm/Routing option from the Configuration pull-down menu as
shown in the following figure.
The Communication and Routing Views allows performing the following
operations:

Local Configuration: definition of the local NE addresses

OS Configuration: addressing of the main and spare OSs connected to the


local NE

NTP Server Configuration: addressing of the main and spare NTP servers
connected to the local NE

Interface Configuration Subdivided in:


LAPD Configuration: definition of the LAPD port parameters for each
LAPD channel on the local NE

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

74 of 308

Ethernet Configuration: definition of configuration parameters needed to


manage a local NE which provides a LAN ethernet interface

OSI Routing Configuration Subdivided in:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

RAP Configuration: configuration of parameters necessary to the


addressing of NE connected by Reachable Address Prefixes in a domain
different from the one of the local NE. This information is stored in RAP
table.
MESA Configuration: configuration of parameters necessary to the
addressing of non IS-IS NE in the same domain as the one of local NE. This
information is stored in MESA table.

IP Configuration Subdivided in:


IP Static Routing Configuration: definition of Host/Network destination
address for IP static routing
OSPF area Configuration: definition of Open Shortest Path First address
IP Address Configuration. Of Point-to Point Interfaces: definition of the
Equipment Controller IP address
Tunneling Configuration Subdivided in:
OSI over IP: definition of destination IP address for IP for OSI over tunneling
IP over OSI: definition of destination NSAP address and type of IP routing
for IP over OSI tunneling
All the previously cited operation can be entered choosing the relevant option of
the menu, as shown in the figure.
The options are described in next paragraphs.

Figure 42 Comm/Routing options


01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

75 of 308

8.3 Local Configuration

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing option and
then from the cascading menu the Local Configuration option.
The dialog-box opens and allows configuring the local address of the NE.

A Local Address section contains the following graphical object:


A Presentation Selector (P. Selector) identifies a presentation entity at
the location identified by the NSAP Address. The presented value must
not be modified.
A Section Selector (S. Selector) identifies a section entity at the
location identified by the NSAP Address. The presented value must not
be modified.
A Transport Selector (T. Selector) identifies a transport entity at the
location identified by the NSAP Address. The presented value must not
be modified.
A Network Service Access Point (NSAP) Address identifies a location in
the network. The first field of the NSAP address, AFI, determines the
NSAP format. The AFI filed is 2 characters long (2 hexadecimal digits)
and, depending on the its value, the length of NSAP address is
variable from 16 characters to 40 characters:
o The value of AFI 49 identifies the local format of variable length
(from 16 characters to 40 characters).
o The value of AFI 39 identifies the ISO-DCC format of 40
characters long.
o The value of AFI 47 identifies the GOSIP-V2 format of 40
characters long.
In all cases the last two fields of the NSAP address are:
o o System Id: uniquely identifies a NE in an area and is 12
characters long . It might be the equipment MAC Ethernet
address, level 2, inserted in the NE or it might be selected by the
operator.
o o Network Selector: provides the distinction among users of
the network service and is 2 characters long (value is "1d").
In the view, the NSAP is managed as simple strings of characters
without any pre-formatting because of the variable format:

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

76 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The following fields are present:

o o a first string of two characters that identifies the AFI field

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

o o a second string of variable length that identifies the


remaining NSAP address

Synonymous Area Addresses section allows having multiple synonymous


area addresses within a level 1 sub domain. The compilation of the two
network addresses is optional and if they are inserted, the last two fields,
System Id and Network Selector, of the mandatory address and of the
synonymous addresses must be the same.

System Type section determines whether the local NE acts as a


"intermediate system level 1" or as a "intermediate system level 2" or as a
"End System". Note that a level 2 intermediate system performs functions of a
level 1 too. End System is not operative.

Ok button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the


dialog-box and closes it; the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a
wait cursor is displayed.
Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data.
Help button provides some useful information about the dialog.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

77 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 43 Local Configuration

8.4 OS Configuration

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing option and
then from the cascading menu the OS Configuration option.
The dialog-box opens and allows configuring the addresses of the Main and Spare
OSs connected to the local NE.
The following fields are present:

Main OS Address section contains the same graphical object of the Local
Address Section in the Local Configuration dialog-box.

Spare OS Address section contains the same graphical object of the Local
Address Section in the Local Configuration dialog-box.

Ok button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the


dialog-box and closes it; the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a
wait cursor is displayed.
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

78 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data.


Help button provides some useful information about the dialog.

Figure 44 OS Configuration

8.5 NTP Server Configuration

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing option and
then from the cascading menu the NTP Server Configuration option.
The dialog-box opens and allows configuring the addresses of the Main and Spare
NTP (Network Protocol synchronization Time) Servers connected to the local NE,
used for time distribution in the network.
The following fields are present:

Enabling NTP Protocol section allows enabling or disabling the NTP Protocol.

Main NTP Server Address section contains the same graphical object of the
Local Address Section in the Local Configuration dialog-box.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

79 of 308

Spare NTP Server Address section contains the same graphical object of the
Local Address Section in the Local Configuration dialog-box.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

If the NTP server is coincident with the OS (same hardware), the same NSAP
address of the OS must be assigned.
Ok button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the
dialog-box and closes it; the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a
wait cursor is displayed.
Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data.
Help button provides some useful information about the dialog.

Figure 45 NTP Server Configuration

8.6 LAPD Configuration


Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing-> Interface
Configuration option and then from the cascading menu the LAPD Configuration
option.
The "LAPD Configuration" dialog opens (see Figure 44, this example has one LAPD
Interface configured).
It contains the following functional block and graphical objects:
- A section named LAPD Interfaces List that allows the user:
To display the list of configured LAPD Interfaces using a graphical table;
To change the role of the LAPD Interface selected in the LAPD Interface List;
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

80 of 308

To delete the LAPD Interface selected in the LAPD Interface List;


To create a new LAPD Interface
- This section contains the following graphical objects:
The number of LAPD interface displayed in the LAPD Interface List;
The LAPD Interface List that lists all the configured LAPD Interfaces; for each
LAPD Interfaces, the table displays:
- The user label of the TTP containing the configured LAPD Interface
(MS/RS/E1A TTP);
- The LAPD role that contains one of the following value:
User
Network
Delete button that allows to delete the LAPD Interface selected in the LAPD
table;
Change Role button that allows too change the role (User or Network) of the
LAPD Interface selected in the table (after selection the Figure 46. is shown
to confirm action required);
Create button that allows to create a new LAPD Interface; this button starts
a new dialog (see Figure 45.) named Create LAPD Interface; it is disabled
when the maximum number of LAPD Interface has been configured.
This Create LAPD Interface dialog contains the following functional blocks and
graphical objects:
A Choose button that allows the operator to select the superior
TTP of the LAPD Interface to be created; this button starts the
TP Search dialog; the TP Search dialog will be configured in
order to display in the right tree only the allowed TTP of the LAPD
Interface;
A section LAPD Role that allows configuring the role (User or
Network) of the LAPD Interface to be created.
This connection is a must to establish connection
between two NE's: if one is configured with User role, the
other one connected must be configured with Network
role.
- A section named Search Criteria that allows the user to display only the LAPD's
of the selected type in the LAPD Table; the section contains the following
graphical objects:
The field Interface Type that allows to select the type of the LAPD's to be
displayed in the LAPD Table; the field will manage both ADM and WDM DCC
type; the value "Ignore" will allow to display all the LAPD types;
The Search button starts the search of the selected LAPD type; this buttons
can be used to refresh the LAPD table too.
The LAPD Interface List will be updated on reception of the
Delete/Create/Change DCC CTP notification. If no LAPD Interface is configured in
the equipment, the message "No LAPD Interface" will be displayed near LAPD
Interface counter (that it is at zero)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

81 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 46 LAPD Configuration dialog


Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.

Figure 47 Creation LAPD Interface


01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

82 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 48 Confirmation to change LAPD Role

8.7 Ethernet Configuration


Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing-> Interfaces
Configuration option and then from the cascading menu the Ethernet
Configuration option.
The dialog-box opens (figure 49) and allows defining the parameters needed to
manage a NE, which provide a LAN Ethernet interface.
The following fields and data are present:

Ethernet Interface field allows defining or removing a Local Area Network


Port for the access to the Data Communication Network.

MAC Address section allows displaying the address of the Network Element
in the Ethernet LAN; it is a read-only field.

OSI Section:
o o L2 only Parameter field indicates if the port shall be used for level 2
traffic only, thus avoiding transmitting L1 packets. Note that the flag shall
be set to No if some other nodes (NEs or OSs) of the same area of the
relevant NE are connected to the Ethernet.
o o L1 Default Metric is a not modifiable field, Priority field can be set
(default value for ethernet is 64)
o o L2 Default Metric is a not modifiable field, Priority field can be set
(default value for ethernet is 64)

IP Section allows defining the node IP Address, IP Mask and the Routing IP
Protocol used; if OSPF or Both options of Routing IP Protocol field are
selected, also the Associated OSPF Area must be set.

Apply button performs a configuration change of the data.


Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

83 of 308

Figure 49 Ethernet Configuration

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK

3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

84 of 308
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 50 Ethernet Configuration -- L2 only parameter

8.8 Reachable Address Prefixes Configuration

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing -> OSI Routing
Configuration option and then from the cascading menu the RAP Configuration
option.
The dialog-box opens and allows configuring the Reachable Address Prefix table.
Each element of the RAP table allows to link a LAPD port or a LAN port of the local
NE to a separate domain; the separate domain is selected by the address Prefixes.
If the addressed element is the OS, the LAN port will be used.
The view simulates a real notebook; it allows the user to select the pages of the
notebook using the pointing device; each page represents a particular element of
the RAP table and the respective pointing device displays the element counter.
In detail, each page contains the following data:

Physical Interface button


o

If the element is empty, displays the "none" value and allows selecting
a LAPD ports or a LAN port, which will be used to reach the addressed
area.

If the element isn't empty, displays the selected port and allows
changing it.

Area Address Prefix section allows the user to address the separate domain.
The Area Address Prefix represents a NSAP address without the fields System
Id and Network Selector.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

85 of 308

MAC Address section allows addressing the element of a domain to be


reached the Ethernet LAN; the field is managed as a simple string of 12
digits.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in


the complete RAP table and close the view; the view is visible until the end of the
operations and a wait cursor is displayed.
New button is used to insert a new page.
Delete button is used to delete the selected page.
Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.

Figure 51 RAP Configuration

8.9 Manual ES Adjacencies table Configuration


Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing -> OSI Routing
Configuration option and then from the cascading menu the MESA Configuration
option.
The dialog-box opens and allows configuring the Manual ES Adjacencies table.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

86 of 308

Each element of the MESA table allows linking a LAPD port or a LAN port of the
local NE to an End System element; the ES element must be in the same area as
the one of the local NE. If the addressed element is the OS, the LAN port will be
used.
The view simulates a real notebook; it allows the user to select the pages of the
notebook using the pointing device; each page represents a particular element of
the MESA table and the respective pointing device displays the element counter.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

In detail, each page contains the following data:

Physical Interface button


o

if the element is empty, displays the "none" value and allows to select
a LAPD ports or a LAN port which will be used to reach the End System
element.

if the element isn't empty, displays the selected port and allows to
change it.

System Id section represents the System Id of the ES element.

MAC Address section allows addressing the element in the Ethernet LAN; the
field is managed as a simple string of 12 digits.

Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in


the complete MESA table and close the view; the view is visible until the end of the
operations and a wait cursor is displayed.
New button is used to insert a new page.
Delete button is used to delete the selected page.
Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

87 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 52 MESA Configuration

8.10 IP Static Routing Configuration


Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing -> IP
Configuration and then from the cascading menu, the IP Static Routing
Configuration option.
The dialog box opens and allows configuring the parameters for IP Static Routing
Configuration.
The following fields and data are present:
[1] Destination Host IP Address: allows defining the IP address necessary to reach a
specific Host
[2] Destination Network: it is alternative to Destination Host IP Address; allows
defining the IP Address IP Mask to reach a network.
[3] Default Gateway IP Address: allows defining the address of the next hop
gateway

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

88 of 308

[4] CLNP (Connection Less Network Protocol): allows to use a pre-define IP over OSI
tunnel to towards a gateway.
[5] IP Point-to-Point Interface Id: allows to use point to point interfaces made
available by EC.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

N.B. Points from [3] to [5] are alternative


Apply button is used to perform a configure change of the data contained in the
complete table and close the view; the view is visible until the end of the
operations and a wait cursor is displayed.
New button is used to insert a new page.
Delete button is used to delete the selected page.
Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.

Figure 53 IP Static Routing Configuration

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

89 of 308

8.11 OSPF Area Table Configuration


Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing -> IP
Configuration and then from the cascading menu, the OSPF Area Table
Configuration option.
The dialog-box opens and allows configure the parameters for OSPF (Open
Shortest Path First) Area Table Configuration.

OSPF Area IP Address

OSPF Area Range Mask

Both fields give synthetically information that includes all the addresses (specific a
NE and to a Network) in an Area.
Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in
the complete RAP table and close the view is visible until the end of the operations
and a wait cursor is displayed.
New button is used to insert a new page.
Delete button is used to delete the selected page.
Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.

Figure 54 OSPF Area Table Configuration

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

90 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The following fields and data are present:

8.12 IP Address Configuration of Point-to-Point Interfaces

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing->IP


Configuration and then from the cascading menu, the IP Address Configuration of
Point-to-Point Interfaces option.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The dialog-box opens and allows setting the Equipment Controller IP address used
to communicate with the ISA board.
OK button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the
dialog-box and closes it; the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a
wait cursor is displayed.
Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data.

Figure 55 IP Address Configuration of Point-to-Point Interfaces

8.13 ISA board IP Address


Operatable only when there is at least one ES1-8FE or ES1-3FE board equipped.
Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing->IP
Configuration and then from the cascading menu, the ISA Board IP Address
option.
The dialog-box opens and allows setting the IP Address of the ISA Board that
communicates with the Equipment Controller (EC).
OK button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the
dialog-box and closes it; the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a
wait cursor is displayed
Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

91 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 56 ISA Board IP Address

8.14 OSI over IP


Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing->Tunneling
Configuration and then from the cascading menu, the OSI over IP option.
The dialog-box opens (Figure 57) and allows configuring the Remote Destination IP
Address of the Equipment Controller.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

92 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 57 OSI over IP Tunnelling configuration


8.15 IP over OSI
Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing->Tunneling
Configuration and then from the cascading menu, the IP over OSI option.
The dialog-box opens and allows configuring the Destination NSAP Address and
the IP Routing Type.
The following fields are present:

Destination NSAP Address:


A Network Service Access Point (NSAP) Address identifies a location in
the network. The first field of the NSAP address, AFI, determines the
NSAP format.
The AFI field is 2 characters long (2 hexadecimal digits) and,
depending on the its value, the length of NSAP address is variable
from 16 characters to 40 characters:

The value of AFI 39 identifies the ISO-DCC format of 40


characters long

The value of AFI 47 identifies the GOSIP-V2 format of 40


characters long

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

93 of 308

System Id: uniquely identifies a NE in an area and is 12


characters long. It might be the equipment MAC Ethernet
address, level 2, inserted in the NE or it might be selected by the
operator.

Network Selector: provides the distinction among users of the


network service and is 2 characters long (value is "1d")

In the view, the NSAP is managed as simple strings of characters


without any pre-formatting because of the variable format:

A first string of two characters that identifies the AFI field

A second string of variable length that identifies the remaining


NSAP address

IP Routing: allows to choose the type of IP routing supported as follows;

OSPF (Open Shortest Path First)

RIP (Routing Information Protocol)

Both

None

If "OSPF" or "Both" options are selected, also the "Associated OSPF


Area" must be set.
Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data
contained in the complete table and close the view is visible until the
end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.
New button is used to insert a new page
Delete button is used to delete the selected page
Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

94 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

In all cases the last two fields of the NSAP address are:

Figure 58 IP over OS

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK

3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

95 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

9. Equipment Management

This section deals mainly with the setting and changing of the boards present on
the Equipment.
Using the menu options, select the Equipment option from the View pull down
menu
The first level of the "Equipment Overview" representation will be displayed directly
into the current window
The Equipment Overview enables a fast navigation through all levels of the
equipment hierarchy. Navigation is done from higher to lower levels.
The NE hierarchy is organized in the following way: Subrack > board > port > TP
The navigation through different levels of the NE hierarchy is performed by double
clicking on the objects:

The first level shows the subrack level of the Equipment view;

Further, by double clicking on a board body, the board level of the


Equipment view can be reached.

Further, by double clicking on a port body contained in the board, the port
level of the Equipment view can be reached. The port view displays the
inner TPs.

It is possible to go back to the upper level of representation by pressing the


<ESC> key on the keyboard;
It is also possible to:

Go back to the previous view, by selecting the Backward


option from the views menu

Go to the next view, by selecting the Forward option from the


view menu

N.B. Selecting in the first level of the Equipment view (subrack level, Figure 59)
The Show supporting equipment option from the Equipment menu, the Rack level
view is presented; further, selecting in the Rack level view the Show supporting
equipment option from the Equipment menu, the Equipment level view is
presented.
In the Rack level view, two subrack are presented:

At the top the 1642EMC Subrack, named SR42C

Further, selecting in the Rack level view the Show supporting equipment option
from the
Equipment menu, the Equipment level view of Figure 60. is presented.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

96 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

9.1 Introduction and navigation

Figure 59 Equipment Overview -- Subrack level

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK

3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

97 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 60 Equipment Overview -- Rack level 1

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK

3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

98 of 308
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 61 Equipment Overview- Rack level 2

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK

3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

99 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 62 Equipment Overview - NE level


In the Subrack view it is possible use the options offered by the Equipment menu
clicking on it in the menu bar.
Alarms indications are present at every NE level.
Details about these alarms indication are given in the Maintenance section.
All the options offered by equipment menu are described in the next paragraphs.
Set and change the boards present on the Equipment is the main function.
Board administrative state that decides on the "in/out of service" of the board is
also described.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

100 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 63 Equipment menu.


Equipment setting operation are defined according the following sequences:
- Configuration of a new board

Configure the board using the option "Set"

Change of board type

"Set out of service" the board

Configure the board using the option "Set"

Remove a board

"Set out of service" the board

"Remove" the board

9.2 Set and change or remove board/subrack


The boards can be set, changed or removed using the menu options of the
Equipment view.
a) Setting or changing a board/subrack
A new board/subrack may be created in either an empty slot or it may replace an
existing Out of Service board/subrack (without the lock symbol). In fact, the Set
option is available only after selecting an empty slot or an Out-of-service board.

Click on the empty slot in which a board/subrack has to be added, or on an


existing Out of Service board in order to change it. The contour becomes
highlighted to show that operations can be done on it.

Select the Set option of the Equipment pull down menu.

The following example of dialogue box containing a list of the different types
of boards/subrack is displayed.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

101 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 64 The list of different boards relative to an NE slot (example)


N.B. The list of boards/subrack displayed during a "Set Board" operation is restricted
to those, which the equipment may accept in the selected slot. Therefore the list
will vary depending on which slot has been selected.
For details on the board/subrack identified by acronyms and NE physical
composition please refers to the Technical Handbook.

Choose the board/subrack type required, by clicking on the corresponding


item in the list. The name of the board is highlighted. Click on the OK push
button to validate the choice.

The board/subrack representation appears on the NE view in the slot when


the board change is effective.
A lock representation appears over the boards ("in-service")

In the Create/Modify dialogue box, the Cancel push button cancels the
operation and closes the dialogue box. The Help push button opens a Help
view giving information about the context.

b) Removing a board/subrack
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

102 of 308

Click on the board/subrack to remove.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The outline of the slot becomes highlighted. This indicates that the board is
selected and that operations can be done on the slot.

If the slot you are working on is already empty no name appears under the
slot.

Select the Remove option the Equipment pull down menu.

From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel
the "Remove" operation.
N.B. It is possible remove a board only if it is not involved in any type of
cross connection (OH bytes included) or Performance monitoring.

c) Modify a board
N.B. This procedure can be done to replace an existing optical module with
another of different type without previously remove it.

Click on the optical module to replace. The outline of the slot becomes
highlighted to show that operation can be done on it.

Select the Modify option of the Equipment pull down menu.

A dialog box containing a list of different types of optical module is


displayed.

Chose the optical module type required by clicking on the corresponding


item in the list; the name of the module is highlighted.

Click on OK push button to validate the choice.

The board representation appears on the N.E. view in the slot when the
board change is effective. A padlock representation appears over the
board.

9.3 Board administrative state


The operator decides to set a board in service or out of service, if it is allowed by
the NE.
N.B. In the equipment view, a lock representation appears over the boards which
are in "in service" state.
9.3.1 Setting a board in service

In the Subrack NE view, click on the board in order to select it.

Select the Set in service option of the Equipment pull down menu.
A lock representation appears over the boards.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

103 of 308

9.3.2 Setting a board out of service

In the Subrack NE view, click on the board in order to select it.

Select the Set out of service option of the Equipment pull down menu. Select
the Ok push button in the confirmation window, which appears.
over the

9.3.3 Consulting a Board's Administrative state


The board's administrative ("in service" or "out of service") state is indicated on the
board view as shown in the following figure.

Figure 65 Consulting a boards administrative state.


9.4 Software description
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

104 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

A lock representation disappears, substituted by the symbol


boards..

Only operative on ES1 board.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

This function allows the operator to visualize information about the software(s)
which is (are) present in the selected board.

Click on a board in which the software is wanted to know (MB or OT1B1unit).


The outline of the slot becomes highlighted. This indicates that the board is
selected and that operations can be done on the slot.

Select the Software description option of the Equipment pull down menu.

Opened dialogue box contains as many folder sheets as there are softwares in the
selected board.
Click on the Close push button to close the dialogue box.

Figure 66 Software Description dialogue box.


9.5 Remote Inventory
This command displays the remote inventory data present in the Subrack and
Boards.

Select the Remote Inventory option of the Equipment pull down menu.
Two options are available:

Subrack level: prints or write on a file the remote inventory data of the
subrack.

Board level: show the remote inventory data of the selected board

For the Board level a dialog similar to Figure 67. appear.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

105 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 67 Remote Inventory


The remote inventory data of the Subrack level can be printed on the default
printer or to a file in postscript or ASCII format.

Figure 68 Select Printer


N.B. If no printer is installed, there is no error message displayed to indicate this.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

106 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 69 Select Output Format for file


9.6 Show supporting equipment
Click on Show Supporting Equipment menu option of the Equipment menu to
navigate to the equipment that supports the selected board.

Figure 70 Equipment Overview -- Subrack level

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

107 of 308

10. Board view

The Board View permits to show the physical port available in a specific board and
to access the Port view.
The "Board view" is reached selecting the Equipment option in the View pull down
menu, then double clicking on the selected board to show the relevant Board
view, presenting the ports.
In case of board with multi access SDH another view permits to select the SDH port
(see example of Figure 71.)
An example of "board view" with the presented port is in Figure 72.
Alarms and Status indications referred to the board level are present at the bottom
of the view, as indicated in the example (Administrative State and Board
Alarms/Status).
This information is "In/Out of service" of the board (Administrative State) and board
alarms and status like "missing" (RUM) or "mismatch" (RUTM), and other indications
typical of each unit.
In the Maintenance section details on this indication are given.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

108 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

10.1 Introduction

Figure 71 Equipment view: select the SDH port on a board.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK

3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

109 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 72 Example of a Board View


A port type is described with a board rectangular view and port identification.
The port identification is usually internal to the rectangular board (see Figure 73.
one example of optical port)

Figure 73. Example of a Port identification and alarm synthesis


The following information is available:

Type of port (name)

State of port (alarm status synthesis)

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

110 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Symbol of the port

The operator is provided with a representation of the port alarm synthesis on each
port.
The messages displayed at the top view provide port denomination.
The messages displayed at the bottom provide information about Board alarms.
A message under the mouse facility provides the name and the port type or the
alarms name. A message appears in the message area in the bottom left corner
of the view.
By double clicking on a board view, it is also possible open the corresponding port
view.
10.2 Board View Menu
Selecting the "Board" option in the menu bar the complete pull down Board menu
is presented:

Port Access: Access the "Port" view.

Note: this option is accessible after the selection of a port contained in the view.

Change Physical Interface: Change the SPI or PPI object into PPI or SPI (and
vice versa) on the bi-mode port (140Mbit/s / STM-1 switch-able). Not
operative in current release.

Show supporting equipment: Navigate to the upper subrack level.

ISA Port Configuration: It allows configuring the TPs for the ATM connections.

Figure 73 Board menu options


These options are described in next paragraphs.
10.2.1 Port Access
Click on Port Access menu option of the Board menu to access the "Port View"
Navigation to the Port view permits to show a detailed alarm presentation of the
port and to set the relevant configurations.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

111 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 74 After Port Access selection (example)


10.2.2 Change Physical Interface
Not operative in current release.
This command allows to change the type of physical interface in a bi-mode port
(140 Mbit/s / 155 Mbit/s switch-able port) i.e. it changes the SPI or PPI object into
PPI or SPI
Select the Symbol of the port in the "Board view".
Click on Change Physical Interface menu option of the Board menu.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

112 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 75 Change Physical Interface


The following dialog box is opened:

Figure 76 Confirmation Infomation


Click on the OK push button to change the physical interface.
Click on the Cancel push button to abort the change of the physical interface.
10.2.3 Show supporting equipment
Click on Show Supporting Equipment menu option of the Board menu to navigate
to the subrack that supports the selected port view.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

113 of 308

Figure 77 Subrack level.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK

3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

114 of 308
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

11. Port view

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

11.1 Introduction
This section describes the operations necessary for the consultation, modification
and configuration of each port.
The Port View permits to set and show the transmission resources (i.e. the
Termination Point, TP) referred to the specific Port; it permits to check the detailed
alarms presented by each TP of the Port, and the available menu permits to
configure the port, (many setting options listed in the port menu are common with
the "Transmission" view).
In these views are presented only the TP specific of the port.
The menu differs according the port type (SDH, PDH, HOA, ATM/ISA/ETH).
The Port View can be accessed from the Equipment or Transmission Views.
The "Port view" is reached selecting the Equipment option in the View pull down
menu then double clicking on the presented rack/subrack to present the subrack
view, as described in chapter "Show supporting equipment"
Double clicking on the selected board the relevant Board view is available
presenting the ports.
By double clicking on a board view, the corresponding port view is opened.
The "Port view" is also reached selecting the Transmission option in the View pull
down menu.
Then the Add TP option of the Transmission menu permits to select and confirm a
TP.
On the transmission view, which appears, select the TP and on the Transmission
menu select the Navigate to a port view option.
The HOA port view can only be reached from the Transmission view, selecting a
VC or TU TP.
The ATM/ISA/ETH TPs are not automatically created when the board is inserted in
the subrack but must be created as explained in chapter ISA Port Configuration
From the Port view it is possible to Navigate to Transmission view.
The port types contain the following TP:

SDH port: Electrical or Optical SPI TTP, RS TTP, port TTP (MSP TTP), AU4 CTP

PDH port: PPI TTP, En CTP, VCn TTP

HOA port: VC4 TTP, TUG3, TUG2, TU3, TU12

IP port: VC3 TTP and VC12 TTP

ETHERNET port: VC3 TTP , VC12 TTP VC3XVTTP, VC12XVTTP, VC3VirtualTTP and
VC12VirtualTTP

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

115 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 78 Example of a SDH Port View


On the port view, the messages displayed at the top view in the form of message
boxes provide more information concerning the type and the alarms of the port.
A message under the mouse facility provides the name and the port type. A
message appears in the message area in the bottom left corner of the view.
11.2 Port View: elements on the TP
The symbols of the TPs (see Figure 79.) have the following meaning:

Alarm Icon Area


The icon boxes represent alarms. The colours of the boxes change
according to the alarm severity.

TP Role
The icon boxes represent the function: Adaptation, Termination or
Compound Adaptation and Termination.

Cross-connected state

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

116 of 308

If the condition of the resource is cross-connected, an icon with a x appears


beneath the box.

Performance State
If the condition of the resource is under performance monitoring, an icon
with a P appears beneath the box.

Loop state

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

If the condition of the resource is under loop, an icon with a L appears


beneath the box

Selected state
An orange frame around the box identifies the TP selection, so port menu
refers to the selected TP.

Figure 79 Termination TP box.


Figure 80. is another example of TP with different G.783 function role.

Figure 80 G.783 Adaptation TP box.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

117 of 308

11.3 Port View Menu


Selecting the "Port" option in the menu bar the complete pull down Port menu is
presented.
The menu differs according the port type (SDH, PDH, HOA and ATM), and is
introduced in the following:

TP configuration: Set parameters for the Signal Label and Path Trace
overhead on

Port mode configuration: set port mode of PDH/SDH/ETHERNET

TP Threshold Configuration: Set B2 excessive BER and Signal Degraded


parameter

TP Frame Configuration: Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G.703/G.704 or ISDN-PRA


management. Not operative in current release.

Set Retiming: Enable/disable the retiming feature on the outgoing 2 Mbit/s


signal.

AU4 Concatenation: Only for SDH ports views. Not operative in current
release.

Cross Connection: Manage the connection of the paths.

Monitoring Operations: Set parameters for POM/SUT and TC (Tandem


Connection) TPs. Not available for PDH port. 1642EMC R1.2 can support
HPOM(not support SUT,TCM/T)

Performance: See and Show Performance Monitoring parameters and data.

Loopback: Manage the loopback commands, for commissioning or


maintenance purposes

Physical Media: Manage the physical setting of the TP of the port. Not
applicable to HOA port. It is described in the following paragraph.

Show supporting board: Navigate to the upper board level. It is described in


this chapter.

Navigate to Transmission view: permit to show a complete overview about


the signal flow, opening all TPs

Navigate to Monitor view: permit to show an overview about the monitoring


operation (POM, SUT, TC) all TPs. Not operative in current release.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

118 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Synchronous TPs.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 81 Examples of port menu options (SDH, PDH)


11.4 Set Retiming
Not operative in current release.
The Retiming feature applies to the outgoing 2 Mbit/s and its purpose is absorb the
jitter / wander that is transferred to the PDH signal when SDH pointer justification
occur. The feature is set individually per port.
Note: Only Board E1RCB8 supports the function of Retiming.
Select a 2Mbit/s port and zoom in to open the port view.
When the Retiming feature is disabled, the color of the state information at the
bottom of the window is brown and the label "Retiming State Disable" is written.
Select the Set Retiming->Enable option from the Port menu.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

119 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 82 Set Retiming enable (before)


As result of this operation the state information color become green and the label
"Retiming State Enable" is written

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

120 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 83 Set Retiming enable (after)


11.5 AU4 Concatenation
Not operative in current release.
11.6 Physical Media option menu
The Port -> Physical Media options permit to set physical configuration of each TP
of the port.
The Physical Media options are also accessible from the Transmission menu.
It opens a menu, which differs according the port type:

SDH port:
- Show Optical Configuration (Not operative in current release)

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

121 of 308

- Als Management
- Tx Quality Configuration
- Single Fiber Configuration
- LAPD Configuration
- Ms Configuration
PDH port: Not operative in current release.
- Line Length Configuration.
- HDSL Configuration. Not operative
- NT G703/704 Configuration. . Not operative
- NT X21 Configuration. . Not operative
- LAPD Configuration. Only operative for 9th dcc of E1RCB8 and 15th
dcc on mainboard

ETHERNET port:
- Remote Laser Management. Not operative
- Als Management. Not operative
- Ethernet Port Configuration. Not operative
- Ethernet Mapping Protocol. Not operative
- ISA Port Configuration. Not operative
- Control Path Activation
- LCAS Configuration

These options are described in next paragraphs except the previously referenced.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

122 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 84 Physical media menu (SDH port example)


11.6.1 Show Optical Configuration
Not operative in current release.
This command permits to get detailed information on the optical characteristics of
the port that is visualized.
Firstly select an optical board and the SPI block, then click on Show Optical
Configuration option from the Physical media pull down menu to visualize the
parameters of the selected optical port.
Shows an example of the parameters of the selected interface.
N.B. This dialogue box can only be read. You cannot write in the entry boxes.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

123 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 85 Visualizing a port optical parameters


The laser ports are identified by three major characteristics:

STM Level: describes the input/output optical interface types: STM1/STM4

The wavelength of the laser source: the units are nanometres (nm = 10-9 m).

The use of the port: describes whether the laser port is used for interoffice
transmissions on long distances (Long Haul ] 40 km) or for infra-office
transmissions on short distances (Short Haul ] 15 km).

The Coloured Interface Parameters section is not applicable in the current release
To close the dialogue box click on the Cancel push button.
11.6.2 Single Fibre Configuration
The single fibre configuration can be realized with passive optical couplers (see
Figure 86. )
The optical coupler must not loop the Tx signal onto the local Rx.
For this purpose and in general to avoid a low Tx/Rx decoupling also when the
optical line is interrupted, an identification label has been assigned to the local Tx
side; the Rx part in the remote receive side checks the congruency between the
received and the expected labels. If a signal label mismatch is recognized on the
received section, an alarm (AIS and RDI) will be generated. Example of Figure 86.
shows that is accepted the label "1" from Tx1 to Rx2 while is accepted label "2"
from Tx2 to Rx1.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

124 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 86 Bidirectional Transmission on a single fibre


Select the Physical media option and then from the cascading menu the SDH
Single Fiber Configuration option.
In the figure that opens, the following fields have to be considered:

Allow Single Fibre - select the transmit mode on the single fibre (enable or
disable).

Transmitted Section:

Transmitted Media Byte - assigned label to Tx (0-14)

Transmitted Media Type - overhead byte used for the


communication:
- Media Dependent byte of Regeneration Section or
- S1 byte of Multiplex Section (the part not used for the
SSM)

Received Section:

Received label

Expected label (0-14)

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

125 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 87 Single Fibre Configuration View


11.6.3 Ms Configuration
Not operative in current release.
The Ms Configuration menu allows the SS bit provisioning for Multiplex Section
Object (MSTTP) in SONET/SDH network interworking.
Select the MSP TP.
Click on Ms Configuration menu option of the Port menu.
This dialog allows selecting between SDH and SONET networks. After the selection
click on Apply and then on Close to close the dialog.
Ms Forced AIS is not supported in the current release.

Figure 88 Ms Configuration

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

126 of 308

11.6.4 Line Length Configuration


Not operative in current release.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

To manage the Line Length configuration click on Line Length Configuration menu
option of the Physical Media menu.
This dialog allows configuring the line length for a PDH PPI TP of a 45 Mbit/s port.
The OK button validates the configuration and closes the dialog box.
The Cancel button removes the dialog

Figure 89 PDH Line Length Configuration View


11.6.5 Ethernet Port Configuration
Not operative in current release.
To set Ethernet port parameters, select the Ethernet Port Configuration option of the
Port -> Physical Media menu.
Subsequently Figure below Will be opened.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

127 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 90. Ethernet Port Configuration Dialog


For the Fast Ethernet (10/100 Mbit/s) port it is possible to choose between two
Configuration Type:
1. Auto navigation : enable allows to configure the "Rate" to be negotiated
(10 or 100 Mb/s). The "Directionality" (Full Duplex) and the "Flow Control"
(Activated) are always enabled and can't be changed.
2. "Manual: allows forcing the "Rate" at 10 or 100 Mb/s.
The "Directionality" is always Full Duplex
Moreover It is possible to Restart the Auto Negotiation by depressing the relevant
button; if parameters has been changed before pressing the Restart button, a
question dialog is displayed to advice that the user has changed data but not
applied them.

Figure 91. Information dialog


In read only mode there are indication if the Auto negotiation on remote side is
activated (Remote Auto Negotiation) and what parameters are allowed on
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

128 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

remote (Remote Allowed Parameters).


In both cases is possible to check the Auto negotiation Current State with the
possible massage:
Completed OK
Completed KO
Configuring
Deactivated
Parallel Defect Fail
Other
At the bottom of the port view are displayed the following indications):
The Interface Type:
S1000 Base SX (only for Gigabit Ethernet board) Not supported in current release.
S1000 Base LX (only for Gigabit Ethernet board) Not supported in current release.
S1000CX (only for Gigabit Ethernet board) Not supported in current release.
S100BaseTX
S100BaseFX
Unknown
S10BaseT
The Bit Rate (only for fast Ethernet board):
10 Mb/s
100 Mb/s
11.6.6 Ethernet Mapping Protocol
Not operative in current release.
Select a VC TP.
Click on Port Ethernet Mapping Protocol option of the Port> Physical Media menu.
Figure below opens.

Figure 92. Ethernet Mapping Protocol (EXAMPLE)


This dialog aims to show the actual Ethernet mapping protocol used and allowing
the user to change it. The options available are the following:
FAST ETHERNET boards:
GFP null extension Header with FCS
GFP null extension Header without FCS
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

129 of 308

11.6.7 Control Path Activation


This dialog allows modifying the state of the Ethernet port virtualTPs.
Select a TP in the Ethernet port view window.
Click on Control Path Activation option of the Port> Physical Media menu.
A new window will be opened; a similar window is displayed when a new
concatenated VCX is created in the ISA Port configuration window.
This dialog aims to show the activation state of the virtualTPs present in the
Ethernet Port View and to change the number of virtualTPs active.
The Active state is reached by choosing the number of Virtual TPs to be active
and click on the Apply button.

Figure 93. Control Path Activation


On the contrary to change in Idle the Active state of a TP decrease the Virtual TPs
to be active field and then and click on the Apply button.
Click on the Refresh button to update the changes.
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

130 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

GFP for packed concatenation extended


GIGABIT ETHERNET boards:
GFP null extension Header with FCS
GFP null extension Header without FCS

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Click on Close button to close the Control Path Activation window.


Example figure below is the Active state.
11.6.8 LCAS Configuration
This dialog allows modifying the state of the Ethernet port.
Select a TP in the Ethernet port view window.
Click on LCAS Configuration option of the Port> Physical Media menu.
A new window will be opened; a similar window is display when a new
concatenated VCX is created in the ISA Port configuration window.
This dialog aim is LCAS (Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme) protocol management
of the TPs present in the Ethernet Port View.
The button "Apply" will set the configuration if the LCAS protocol is enabled.
In the following picture we can note that are managed all the attributes described
before and the two actions are managed by means of the two buttons
(Enable/Disable and Monitoring...).

Figure 94. LCAS Configuration


The "Monitoring..." button start the "LCAS protocol monitoring" view like the figure
below.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

131 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 95. LCAS Monitoring

11.7 Show Supporting Board


Select a TP.
Click on Show Supporting Board menu option of the Port menu to navigate to the
board that supports the selected port view.
Figure 96. (Example) opens.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

132 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 96 Board View Example.

11.8 Navigate to Transmission View


Select a TP.
Click on Navigate to Transmission View menu option of the Port menu to navigate
to the corresponding Transmission View that is related to the selected TP.
Navigation to the Transmission view permits to show a complete overview about
the signal flow as for the example of the following figure.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

133 of 308

01
Edition
FCG - OND

3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 97 Navigate to Transmission view selection

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK

134 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 98 After Navigate to Transmission view selection


11.9 Navigate to Monitoring View
Select a TP where are configured some Monitoring Operations POM (not support
SUT,TCM/T)
Click on Navigate to Monitoring View menu option of the Port menu to navigate to
the corresponding Monitoring View that is related to the selected TP.
Navigation to the Monitoring view permits to show a complete overview about the
Monitoring Operations HPOM (not support SUT,TCM/T) as for the example of the
following figure.
In Figure 99. is shown an example of Monitoring View of a TP with HPOM both
before and after matrix.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

135 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 99 View of Monitoring Operations (example)


Port View command
11.10 Port Mode Overview
Click on Port mode option of the Configuration> Port mode menu. Figure below.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

136 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 100 Port Mode Menu Option

Figure 101 Port Mode Overview Dialog

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

137 of 308

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

138 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

You can select the port type you want to see, and click the search button to list
them. As below, then you can click the port you want to set at the found port list
table. And set the port mode.
Port Mode Overview Dialog allows a centralized mechanism for:
System wide search for Port Mode settings
Change of Port Mode setting
Change of Port Mode default.
System wide search capability is offered in order to show port mode value
representation for all ports in
a NE or in a port subset.
The subset is defined according to the filtering capabilities on Port Type (all ports,
SDH port Only, PDH
port Only, Ethernet port only only) and to the Port Mode set (Ignore, Mon, Auto).
Change of Port Mode setting can be done on the selected ports in the matrix
gadget. Multiple selection
is allowed. The user can choose the new Port Mode ( in the Define Port Mode
Values field) and can start
the change on the selected ports (Set Mode).
Change of Port Mode System Default can be done in the related frame. Current
system default is visualized in the combo box current value.
Port Mode Overview dialog is available both at Configuration menu and Port View
menu and Transmission
View as well.
Using it at Configuration menu the multi port working mode is enabled with full
support for search and
filtering.
Using it in Port View or Transmission View enable the single port functionality and
the search capability
is greyed out.

Figure 102 Set the selected port mode

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK

3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

139 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

12. Transmission View

This section describes the operations necessary for the consultation, modification
and configuration of TPs, providing a representation of the entire signal flow.
The generic Transmission View, described in this chapter, offers the possibility of
displaying a single TP or a set of all kinds of TPs (or collected functionality which is
represented by one/several TPs).
To display the termination points in the Transmission View, either select specific TPs
from a TP search dialog or access the view directly from another view, e.g. by
navigating from the Port View.
The Transmission View provides the following features:

Brief overview regarding transmission resources.


o

An overview concerning all TPs belonging to a port can be called in


by activating the function to expand the selected TP. TP names are
listed in an additional information area if the mouse pointer is
positioned over it. The following states are indicated:
- The alarm state is indicated by the alarm synthesis icon
- The cross-connection state is indicated by a cross
- Whether a TP can be structured is indicated by a circle
- Whether a TP is under Performance Monitoring is
indicated by a blue "P" letter
- Whether a TP is involved in a loop action, it is indicated
by an arrow

An overview concerning signal flow can be requested by a user action. The


user can select a TP and apply the action Show Cross-connected TPs. The
result is that the objects related to the TP are displayed and lines indicate
the connections. Expanding and hiding TPs that are related to the currently
selected TP (e.g. show all TPs that are above the TU-12 CTP) enables all
related TPs to be added to the view, thus providing a representation of the
entire signal flow.

Display of single or multiple termination points.


o

Search for and select a termination point in a TP search dialog and


display it in the Transmission View.

Pop-up the Transmission View from the board view. All TPs/compound
TPs associated with the physical port are displayed (i.e. TPs down to
AU-4).

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

140 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

12.1 Overview

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Provide the functionality to create/show cross-connections.

Provide the functionality to create/show Multiplex Section Protection (Not


operative in the current release)

Provide the functionality to create/show Loopback commands.

Provide the possibility of configuring a selected TP. This functionality is


accessed by calling the configuration dialogs of the common
Transmission/Port Views category.

Provide the possibility of showing a detailed view of a TP with alarms,


navigating to the Port view.

Provide the possibility of showing and setting Performance Monitoring


parameters and data.

12.2 View elements


The Transmission View uses the symbols illustrated in Figure 103.

Figure 103 Symbols Used in Transmission View


01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

141 of 308

12.3 View Layout

12.3.1 View Description


Figure 104. illustrates the Transmission View area. TPs that are received from the
network element are displayed in the Transmission View with the respective TP and
connection symbols described in the number of TPs presented initially depends on
whether the Transmission View is popped up from a board view, whether a TP has
been selected in another view or whether it is called without a selected TP.
When the "Transmission view" is reached selecting the Transmission option in the
View pull down menu in its initial state contains no objects.

Figure 104 Transmission View Area


01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

142 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The Transmission View is a main view. It provides views of specific areas, which
display the transmission resources, and the specific Transmission View pull-down
menu, which provides the Transmission View operations.

12.3.2 Number of TPs Displayed in Transmission View


It is possible both to expand a VC-4, thus displaying all underlying TPs, and to hide
TPs, which are of no interest. The objects initially displayed depend on the
situation/definition.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

12.3.3 Naming TPs


The following rules are applied in order to identify the TPs displayed:

The root node contains the full user label,

All child nodes contain a short label indicating the position inside the tree.

12.3.4 Dynamic View Behaviour


The following section describes the view states and provides a short description of
events that affect the view.
Initial state of the view
In its initial state, the Transmission View contains no objects. Objects can be
searched for and displayed using the Add TP dialog.
Working state of the view
In its working state, the Transmission View already contains objects. If the operator
searches for and displays a TP using the TP Search dialog, the view is first initialized
again and then the TP is displayed. The same applies in the case of navigation
from another view to the Transmission View - the Transmission View is always
initialized and the corresponding objects are then displayed in it.
Navigation to Transmission View from other views
If the Transmission View is popped up from the Port View, only the selected TP is
displayed.
Alarm notification
Alarms concerning the TPs displayed are indicated graphically by the alarm
synthesis icons of the TP objects. The TP objects are updated accordingly.
Object deletion
All kinds of object deletion events related to TPs displayed are indicated by the TP
objects. The graphical objects are removed accordingly from the Transmission
View. Example: modification of the payload structure from 63 TU-12 to 3 TU-3.
12.4 Transmission view access and menu
The "Transmission view" can be reached selecting the Transmission option in the
View pull down menu. In this case, in its initial state, the Transmission View contains
no objects.
In the case of navigation from another view (example the "Port view") to the
Transmission View, the Transmission View is always initialized and the corresponding
objects are then displayed in it.
Selecting the "Transmission" option in the menu bar the complete pull down
Transmission menu is presented
The following menu items are available:

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

143 of 308

Add TP
view.

Select the TP to show on the Transmission

Expand
TP.

Hide
or the selected TP.

Hide TPs that are related to the selected TP

TP Configuration
Synchronous TPs.

Set parameters for the Overhead on

TP Frame Mode Configuration Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G.703/G.704 or


ISDN-PRA management , not operative in current release.

TP Threshold Configuration
Set B2 ExBER ( Degraded Signal not operative
in current release ) parameters.

Terminate TP
operative in current release)

Terminate a path on a AU-4 CTP (Not

Disterminate TP
operative in current release)

Disterminate a path on a AU-4 CTP (Not

AU4 Concatenation

Cross-Connection

Monitoring Operations
Create, configure and delete POM/SUT and
TC TPs. 1642EMC R1.2 can support HPOM(not support SUT,TCM/T)

Performance
parameters and data.

Structure TPs
destructuring selected TP

Loopback
Manage the loopback commands, for
commissioning or maintenance purposes

Physical Media

Manage the physical TP setting.

Show Supported Board

Navigate to the upper board level.

Navigate to Port View Permit to show the detailed alarm of the TP.

Not operative in current release


Manage the connection of the paths.

Set and show Performance Monitoring


Provides the possibility of structuring and

These options are described in next paragraphs except the previously referenced.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

144 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Display TPs that are related to the selected

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 105 Transmission menu options


12.5 Add TP
Select the Transmission -> Add TP option.
This menu item opens the TP Search dialog. The TP Search dialog enables the user
to search for and add a TP to the Transmission View (e.g. search for all TPs on a
board with PM enabled).
12.5.1 TP Search
Default Mode
In this mode, the dialog displays the structure of the equipment tree. After doubleclicking, e.g. on a port, the contents of the port appear on the right-hand side of
the dialog (TP list). To keep the number of items displayed small, they are displayed
in a hierarchical order. Double-click again to recall the next level

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

145 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 106 TP Search Dialog, Initial State


After double-clicking on an object, an Information window appears (see Figure
107). The message text corresponds to the object selected.

Figure 107 Information Window


It is possible to select several individual TPs from the TP list by clicking on them while
holding down the Ctrl key on the keyboard. To select a block of TPs, click on the
first TP and then click on the last TP in the block while holding down the Shift key on
the keyboard. But only the first TP selected in the list will be shown in the
Transmission View.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

146 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 108 TP Search Dialog with Various TP Selections


After clicking on Show CC State, a more detailed TP list is displayed containing TP
cross connection status information.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

147 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 109 TP Search Dialog with Status Information Displayed


The symbols in the TP list have the following significance:

Figure 110 Symbols in TP Search


The background color of the symbols represents the status of the TP:

Grey = inactive

Green = active

An easy way to recall to previously displayed boards is to use Board History. Select
the relevant board from the list.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

148 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 111 Board History Check List


Search Mode
Use Search Mode together with the filtering options provided below the TP list. The
following options are available:

Class:
Example: Ignore, TU-12, VC-12, VC-12+TU-12, TU-3, VC-3, VC-3+TU-3, AU-4, VC4, VC-4+AU-4.

Connection State (Current connectivity status):


Ignore, not connected, connected

Alarm State (Path Trace):


Ignore, critical, major, minor, warning, not alarmed

Assign State:
Ignore, NML, EML

Perf. Monitoring (Performance Monitoring condition):


Ignore, enabled

TTI expect: not used

TTI receive: not used

TTI transmit: not used

Location:
Permits to insert the location of the TP in the following format:
r<rack#>sr<subrack#>sl<slot#><port#>

Name: not supported

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

149 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 112 TP Search Dialog with Different Filtering Options


After activating the search process with the Search TP button, the following dialog
box appears. The search can be interrupted by clicking on Cancel.

Figure 113 Information... Dialog for Search Process


N.B. When searching for PM-enabled TPs on NE, Rack or Subrack, the time for the
request can be very high. It is recommended to search for PM-enabled TPs at the
board level (a board is selected for the search).
Common Buttons
The following buttons are available in all modes:
Ok
Closes the dialog and opens the Transmission View containing the selected TP.
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

150 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Close
Closes the dialog without updating the Transmission View.
Print
This command is used to generate and print a list of TPs according to the current
filter selection.
The command opens the following dialog:

Figure 114 Print to Printer


Select the desired printer from the list box and click on Ok to start the print job or
abort with Cancel.
The dialog changes after clicking on File:

Figure 115 Print to File


Enter the name of the output file in the input field or select a file name from the File
Select dialog by clicking on Select file. Select if the output format should be
Postscript or ASCII.
The output file is generated after clicking on Ok. Use Cancel to stop the process.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

151 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 116 Example Printout


Help
This command opens the online help for the TP-Search dialog.
12.6 TP Configuration
Select the Port -> TP Configuration option when you select a TP.
12.6.1 High Order TP Configuration
Depending on the TP selected, a dialog appears for the configuration of the main
parameters of the objects. Example:

VC-4 TTP

VC-3 TTP (34 and 45 Mbit/s PDH)

Mod VC-4 TTP (matrix resource)

The main parameters are:

C2 Signal Label: "Automatic" (decided by the NE) or "Equipped not specific".

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

152 of 308

J1 Path Trace.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The dialogs of the following figure appears:

Figure 117 High Order TP Configuration

12.6.1.1 J1 Path Trace


Being operative only on VC-4 and VC-3 in current release.
If the Path Trace is 16 bytes long, the first byte is a CRC7 checksum calculated by
NE.
If the Path Trace is shorter than 16 bytes, it is filled with zero bytes ("0" hexadecimal).
Received fields are read only.
With the relevant button the operator can set the Expected field as:

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

153 of 308

- TTI Enable
- TTI Disable
-TTI Repeated
The Transmitted field can be set with TTI Enable or TTI Repeated byte

To replace modified with the default, enter the default manually according to the
following table
Table 2. Default value for C2/V5 Signal Label
TP
VC-4 TTP / AU4 CTP
VC-4 TTP
(SDH)
(PDH)
Significant
C2
C2
Byte
Default value

18

VC3-TTP

VC-12 TTP

C2

V5

12.6.1.2 C2 Signal Label


Received, Expected and Transmitted fields are read only.
They can display the following number, according the G.707 recommendations for
the C2 Signal Label:

0: Unequipped

1: Equipped non-specific

2: TUG structure

3: Locked TU-n

4: Asynchronous 34/45Mbyte

18: Asynchronous 140Mbyte

19: ATM

20: MAN, DQDB

21: FDDI.

In the Transmitted field it is possible to select the values:

Automatic: the C2 Signal Label value is automatically selected by the NE


according the VC structure.

Equipped not specific (it corresponds to number 1)

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

154 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Empty TTI button permits to send an all zeroes path trace.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

12.6.2 J0 Section Trace management


Select RST block and then select Port -> TP Configuration
The fields of the following figure appears:

Figure 118 J0 Configuration


This function is implemented in order to manage the J0 Trace configuration.
This dialog shows the current values for received, expected and transmitted trail
trace and it allows the operator to change only the values of expected and
transmitted trail trace.
The received trail trace is read-only.
Expected and Transmitted fields are editable by the operator.
With the relevant button it is possible to enable or disable TTI Monitoring.
12.6.3 Low Order TP Configuration
Depending on the TP selected, a dialog to configure the main parameters of the
following objects:

VC-12 TTP.

The main parameters are:

V5 Signal Label. "Automatic" (decided by the NE) or "Equipped not specific".

J2 Path Trace.

The following dialogs appears:

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

155 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 119 Low Order TP Configuration


12.6.3.1 J2 Path Trace
If the Path Trace is 16 bytes long, the first byte is a CRC7 checksum calculated by
the NE.
If the Path Trace is shorter than 16 bytes, it is filled with zero bytes ("0" hexadecimal).
Expected and Transmitted fields are editable by the operator.
Mode1 enable the 16 bytes long sequence for Path trace
One repeated byte allows setting one byte that will be repeated
Received fields are read only.
With the relevant button it is possible to enable or Disable TTI Monitoring.
Empty TTI send an all zeroes path trace.
12.6.3.2 V5 Signal Label
Received, Expected and Transmitted fields are read only.
They can display the following number, according the G.707 recommendations for
the V5 Signal Label:
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

156 of 308

0: Unequipped

1: Equipped non-specific

2: Asynchronous

3: Bit Synchronous

4: Byte Synchronous

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

In the Transmitted field it is possible to select the values:

Automatic: the C2 Signal Label value is automatically selected by the NE


according the VC structure.

Equipped not specific (it corresponds to number 1)

To replace modified with the default, enter the default manually according to the
value reported in Table 2.
12.7 TP Frame Mode Configuration
Not operative in current release.
This command is available for:
- E1 or P12
Select the Transmission -> TP Frame Mode Configuration option
TP Frame Mode Configuration can also be accessed from the "Port" and
"Synchronization" view menu.
This menu item enables the configuration of the most important transmission
parameters concerning the Primary Rate Access and G.703/G.704 frame
management.
The following dialog appears:

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

157 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 120 TP Frame Mode Configuration


The windows contains the following graphical objects:
- "Framed Signal Mode" that allows to configure the attribute framed Signal
Mode; the user can choose one of the following value:

"Not Framed" (G.703 interface): the PRA function cannot be activate;

"Framed without PRA" (G.704): the behaviour according to ETS 300-233 is


applied in the handling of BITS of Time Slot 0 in terms of state, defect
detection and consequent action;

"Framed with PRA": PRA function are activated

"Framed with leased line PRA" a proprietary leased line behaviour is a


applied.

- "CRC4 Mode" that defines the monitoring capabilities applied to the signal with
a CRC multiframe:

"Enabling": enable or disable the CRC-4 error counting

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

158 of 308

"Remote Indication": red-only field that indicates if status of CRC-4 error


counting functionality of far-end NE is enabled or disabled

"Frame Status" that reports an indication of the received signal:

"No indication"

"The 2Mb/s signal is multi-frame"

Press OK to apply the parameters or Cancel to close the dialog


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

12.8 TP Threshold Configuration


This menu allows the operator to set the alarm thresholds for MST and VCn layer.
Select the MST or the VCn block
Select the Transmission -> TP Threshold Configuration option.
Figure 112. will be opened.
The user can select one of the two different Defect distributions:
- Poisson distribution enable configuration of the Excessive Bit Error Ratio (ExBER
on MST, VCn) threshold and of the Signal Degrade (SD on MST, VC) threshold of the
TPs related counted primitives. (Note: Signal Degrade Threshold Configuration is
operative on VC4 and MST)
- Bursty distribution enable configuration of the maximum number of error frames
and the total a amount of bad block per frame. Not operative in current release.
- ExBER - Threshold: 10-3 to 10-5
- Enable Consequent Actions: fixed to enables
- Signal Degrade - Threshold: 10-5 to 10-9 . Only operative on VC4 and MST
- Bursty Parameters - Threshold: 1 or 10 or 100 or 1000. Not operative in current
release.
- Bursty Parameters - Consecutive Bad Seconds: 2 to 10. Not operative in current
release.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

159 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 121 Degraded Signal Threshold selection


Click on OK to confirm the chosen parameters.
12.9 Terminate/Disterminate TP
Not operative in current release.
Select the Transmission -> Terminate TP or Disterminate TP option.
Only one command in the menu is available, depending on whether a TP is
terminated or not.
12.9.1 Terminate TP
Not operative in current release
Use this action to terminate a path. It can be performed on an AU-4 CTP.
A cross-connection between the selected AU-4 CTP (= aTP) and a modifiable VC-4
TTP (= bTP) is created. Three TUG-3 and TU-3 are created if the modifiable VC-4 TTP
was not already structured.
A cross appears in the icon of the terminated TP:

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

160 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 122 Terminated TP


12.9.2 Disterminate TP
Not operative in current release.
Use this action to disterminate a path. It can be performed on a AU-4 CTP. The
related cross-connection is deleted.
12.10 Monitoring Operations
Not operative in current release.
Select the Transmission -> Monitoring Operations option as for the following figure.
Creation/Deletion and Configuration options are present.

Figure 123 Monitoring Operation Menu


Monitoring Operations can also be accessed from the "Port" view menu.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

161 of 308

The commands of this menu item are for the management of the HPOM (not
support SUT,TCM/T) (Path Overhead Monitoring, Supervised Unequipped
Termination and Tandem Connection).

AU-4 CTP

TU-3 CTP

TU-12 CTP

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

This command is available for:

12.10.1 Creation/Deletion
The dialog allows multiple object creation/deletion.
The dialog shown in the following Figure 115.opens

Figure 124 Monitoring Operations Creation/Deletion


The Path Overhead Monitoring has the following parameters:

Before Matrix (available only on AU-4 CTP)

After Matrix

The Supervisory Unequipped Termination, not operative in current release, has the
following parameters:

Sink (before matrix)

Sink (after matrix)

Source

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

162 of 308

Bidirectional

The Tandem Connection has the following configurable parameters:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Tandem Connections Monitoring (TCM):


-

TCM Before Matrix

TCM After Matrix

Tandem Connection Termination (TCT):


-

TCT Bidirectional Before Matrix

TCT Bidirectional After Matrix

Press Ok to apply the parameters or Close to close the dialog and discard the not
with Ok applied changes.
When select and apply the Path Overhead Monitoring, the changes will be
displayed in the Port View in the following manner:

Figure 125 Display of POM and TCM in Port View (example)


When select and apply the Tandem Connection Monitoring / Tandem Connection
Termination, the changes will be displayed in the Port View in the following
manner:

Figure 126 Display of POM and TCM/TCT in Port View (example)

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

163 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

12.10.2 Configuration
Depending on the parameters selected in the Monitoring Operations
Creation/Deletion dialog, not all sections of the dialog are available.
N.B. It is possible to open the POM and TCT/TCM Configuration dialog for a CTP
even if neither Path Overhead Monitor nor Tandem Connection was created
before (SUT isn't available in this release). No changes can be made in this case
and the values displayed can be ignored.

Figure 127 Monitor Configuration

TTI Definition
The TTI (Trail Trace Identifier) has a maximum length of 16 characters.
The following TTI Definitions are available:

TTI Expected

TTI Received without the display

TTI Sent

The following TTI Types are available:


01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

164 of 308

TTI Enabled

TTI Disabled

TTI Repeated Byte

Error Distribution

Poisson and Bursty error distribution are supported

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

TCM/TCT ConsActions

It is needed to support explicit consequent action activation (AIS insertion) for TCT
sink and bidirectional.

Thresholds

Set the thresholds of the following parameters:

Signal Degrade
Poisson mode only: from 10-5 to 10-9.

Excessive Error
Poisson mode only: from 10-3 also if presented a selection from 10-3 to 10-5

Bursty Degrade
Select a value between 1 and 1000 errors/sec for the Bursty Degrade
threshold.

Bursty Consecutive
Select a value between 2 and 10 sec for the Bursty Degrade Consecutive.

Alarm Timing

Raising and Clearing Timing are not supported by OMSN.

Unequipped Trail

Not available

12.11 Structure TPs


Select the Transmission -> Structure TPs option.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

165 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 128 Structure TP


This menu item provides the possibility of structuring and destructuring a selected
TP. The level that is selected defines how the signal is to be structured, e.g. if a VC4 TTP is selected and the menu item TU-12 is chosen, the signal is structured down
to 63 TU-12 CTPs. The following menu items represent all those possible:

TU-2. Not supported.

TU-3.

TU-12.

VC-3/VC-4. Not supported.

VC-12. Not supported.

The following items are available for synchronous TPs:

Modifiable VC-4 TTP: TU-3, TU-12

TUG-3: TU-3, TU-12

TUG-2: TU-12.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

166 of 308

12.12 Loopback

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The commands of this menu item are for the management of the loopback
commands, for commissioning or maintenance purposes.
12.12.1 Loopback Configuration
The loopback can be applied at line (external to equipment) level or at internal
equipment level. The loopback commands are used to separate the
communication network into independent part checking the line/equipment
functionality during the network installation or maintenance operation.
The loopback architecture provides four configurations (see Figure 120. ).
Line Loopback And Continue
Line Loopback And AIS
Internal Loopback And Continue
Internal Loopback and AIS

Figure 129 Loopback configurations


Select a TP that supports the Loopback Configuration
Loopback act on the following TPs:

PDH board (from the Port View and Transmission view):


- Line loopback performed on:

P for 2/34/45/140 Mbit/s PPI (140Mbit/s Not operative in current


release)

- Internal loopback performed on:


01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

167 of 308

p12 for 2Mbit/s CTP

p31 for 34/45Mbit/s CTP

p4 for 140Mbit/s CTP , Not operative in current release.

SDH board:

- Line loopback performed on:

EIS for electrical STM-1 SPI

OpS for optical STM-1(STM-4, STM-16 SPI Not operative in current


release)

- Internal loopback performed on:

MsT TTP for STM-1( STM-4, STM-16 ports Not operative in current
release)

Select the Transmission -> Loopback -> Port Loopback Configuration option.
Port Loopback Configuration can also be accessed from the "Port" view menu.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

168 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The loopback configuration can be done only on SDH ports with the acronym
ending with an "N" letter (i.e. P4S1N, S-4.1N, L-4.1N, L-4.2N, etc.)

Figure 130 Open Loopback Configuration.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK

3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

169 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 131 Port Loopback View


Choose the TP clicking on the "Choose TP" button. Select the TP where to apply the
loopback command. For this NE the "Timed Loopback" field is not managed and
thus Start/Stop loopback time is not editable.
12.12.2 Loopback Management
To manage the loopback configuration select the Transmission -> Loopback ->
Loopback Management option.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

170 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 132 Open Loopback Management


Loopback Management can also be accessed from the "Port" view menu and
from the "Configuration menu
Figure 124. opens.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

171 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 133 Loopback Management


The configured loopback are listed into the current loopback table. This table can
be managed by the "Search" criteria, "Delete" and "Create" commands.

Search Criteria (operative): to configure the filter select the "Loop and
Continue" type (Yes= Loop And Continue, No= Loop And AIS) then select
the "Directionality" Internal or Line and edit the Initial TP Id (write: rack,
subrack, board, port# and the TP type: EIS (SPI/PPI Electrical), OpS (SPI/PPI
Optical), MST and so on. For "Initial TP" has to be intended the outgoing
signal while for "Destination TP" the incoming signal. Enable the filter through
the "Toggle Filter" Enable/Disable button. Click on the "Search" button to start
the configured loopback research into the current loopback table.

The "Delete" command permits to delete a loopback listed in the Current


loopback Table: select a loopback in the list and click on the "Delete"
button.

The "Create" command permits to create a new loopback configuration:


clicking on "Create" the previous figure opens. Follow the previously
paragraph indications to create a new loopback configuration.

12.13 Physical Media


Select the Transmission -> Physical Media option.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

172 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 134 Physical Media


The Physical Media options permit to set physical configuration of each TP.
It opens a menu in which the various options will be available according the TP's
type (for the option common with the "Port view" reference is made to the
relevant paragraph):
- TX Quality Configuration.
- Single Fiber Configuration.
- Extra traffic Not operative
- Multiplex Section management Not operative
- Line Length Configuration. Not operative in current
- Set Domain.
- HDSL Configuration Not operative
- NT Configuration Not operative
- X21 Configuration Not operative
12.13.1 Set Domain
This option is referred to the SECurity management and allows the user to set the
Manager list and the Access Control Domain of the selected TP.
Select the block: EIS for Electrical SDH port, OpS for Optical SDH port, P (PPI) for
PDH port.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

173 of 308

Select the Set Domain option from the Physical Media cascade menu to present
the following view:
The dialog-box contains the following fields:
NML Assignment: each connected manager to the TP is highlighted in the
list. The user can set a manager clicking on the denomination.
Several managers can be enabled contemporaneously, having in charge
the TP.
The Manager List contains the list of managers (i.e. RM, SY, NPOS , EML) that
work on the NE. The EML-USM administrator (SH or Craft Terminal) should set
the Manager List only to remove a manager in case of emergency (i.e. the
Manager misses the NE connection).

Resource domain field allow selecting the domain among that displayed in
the list, assigning it to the TP.

The different domains could be assigned to different operators.


OK button is used to validate the selection.
Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data.
Help button provides some useful information about the dialog.

Figure 135 Set Domain


12.14 Navigation Commands
12.14.1 Expand
Select the Transmission -> Expand option.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

174 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 136 Expand TPs


This menu item provides the possibility of displaying TPs that are related to the
selected TP. These may be TPs that are contained by the TP or TPs, which belong to
the physical port that is actually connected to the TP.

Show next level of lower TPs,

Show all lower TPs,

Show next level of upper TPs,

Show all upper TPs.

12.14.2 Hide
Select the Transmission -> Hide option.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

175 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 137 Hide TPs


This menu item provides the possibility of hiding all upper/lower TPs of a selected TP
and the deletion of a selected TP.

Lower TPs,

Upper TPs,

Selected TPs.

12.14.3 Show Supported Board


Select the Transmission -> Show Supported Board option.
This menu provides the possibility of navigating directly to the board that supports
the TP.
The Board View appears.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

176 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 138 Board View

12.14.4 Navigate to Port View


Select the Transmission -> Navigate to Port View option.
This menu provides the possibility of navigating to the corresponding Port View
related to the selected TP in order to access a detailed overview of alarms quickly.
The Port View appears.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

177 of 308

Figure 139 Port View

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK

3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

178 of 308
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

13. Cross-Connection Management

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

13.1 Introduction
13.1.1 Overview
The purpose of this domain is to manage the connection of the high and low level
path.
The following chapters provide the user with information concerning operations on
cross-connections:

"Multiplex Structures for SDH" gives an overview on the SDH technology

"Definition of Termination Points" gives an overview about the termination


points implemented on the NE

"Cross-Connection Types" provides information concerning cross-connection


types supported by the NE

"Cross-Connection Protection" provides information concerning crossconnection protection supported by the NE

"Operative sequence to execute Cross-Connections" details the complete


procedure to realize cross-connection

"Cross-Connections Management" details the contents of the main crossconnections view

"Create/Modify Cross-Connections" describes the creation and modification


of cross-connections

"Activate/Deactivate/Delete Cross-Connections" describes the activation,


deactivation and deletion of cross-connections. Activation and
deactivation not supported in current release.

"Split and Join Cross-Connections" describes how to split or join bidirectional


cross-connections.

"Protection Switching" deals with switching actions (force, manual, lockout


protection) on cross-connections

"Print" deals with printing out list entries on printers or into files

"Port Switch Over" not operative.

"Show Cross-Connected TPs" describes the possibility of showing connections


between two or more TPs of different hierarchies, e.g. connection between
au4 and vc4.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

179 of 308

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

180 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

13.1.2 Multiplex Structures for SDH


By introducing the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH), a standardized
transmission has been created, matching the European with the American
standard. The SDH signal structure contains an extended overhead as well as a
fixed pointer controlled assignment of the user signal elements, thus improving the
possibilities of the network management.
Signals of the Synchronous and Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) are packed
by synchronous multiplexers into Virtual Containers (VC). The STM-1 signal structure
is achieved by using the multiplex structure complying with ITU-T and ETSI, (see
Figure 131. ). Each of the user channels (2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 45 Mbit/s and 140
Mbit/s) is packed into a container synchronous to the STM-1 frame according to a
predefined structure.
To adjust the plesiochronous signals to the synchronous network clock, certain
filling algorithms are available. Fix fill bits are inserted into synchronous signals. A
byte column (9 Byte) as Path Overhead (POH) is added to the Container (C)
generated. Path Overhead and Container together form the Virtual Container
(VC). With the pointer pointing to the start of the VC, in respect of the STM-1 frame,
an Administrative Unit (AU) or - if several Containers of a group are to be
combined - a Tributary Unit (TU) is generated. Several TUs form a Tributary Unit
Group (TUG) and TUGs again can be combined into a VC. The AU of the signal,
together with the Section Overhead (SOH), finally makes up the STM-1 frame.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 140 SDH Multiplex Structure according to ITU-T G.709


The STM-1 frame consists of:

a Section Overhead (SOH)

an AU Pointer area

a payload area

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

181 of 308

The STM-1 frame has a basic bit rate of 155.520 Mbit/s. A single user channel is
packed into a Virtual Container. These Virtual Containers are of different size and
may be nested or packed differently.
Virtual Containers for the European bit rates:

the STM-1 frame contains a VC-4,

a VC-4 may contain one C-4 or three TUG-3,

each TUG-3 may contain one VC-3 or seven TUG-2,

each TUG-2 contains three VC-12 or one VC-2.

An STM-1 user signal can be constructed of:

either 1 x VC-4

or 3 x VC-3

or 2 x VC-3 + 7 x VC-2

or 2 x VC-3 + 21 x VC-12

or 1 x VC-3 + 14 x VC-2

or 1 x VC-3 + 7 x VC-2 + 21 x VC-12

or 21 x VC-2

or 14 x VC-2 + 21 x VC-12

or 7 x VC-2 + 42 x VC-12

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

182 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 141 Frame Construction within the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

or 63 x VC-12.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

STM-N signals are constructed by integer multiples of the basic signal STM-1 of
155.520 Mbit/s. For example an STM-16 signal of 2.488.320 Mbit/s is generated by
combining sixteen STM-1 signals byte interleaved.
13.1.3 Definition of Termination Points (TP)
When ports are depicted on the user interface, the following abbreviations are
used.
This section concerns the multiplex structure as well as on the information model of
object-oriented programming which was used when forming the user interface. As
a rule, a Termination Point (TP) is the starting and terminating point of a transmission
segment. A distinction is made between the following types of TPs:

CTP (Connection Termination Point)


The CTP represents the termination of a connection. The transmission signal is
"terminated", i.e., the received signal is monitored and the error signalling
evaluated, while own-code signalling is inserted in the transmitted signal.

TTP (Trail Termination Point)

The TTP represents the termination of a transmission segment. The signal is


monitored and passed on after modification in one form or another.
Both TP types exist on the SDH level and the PDH level.

CTPs on SDH level


On SDH level (see Figure 142. ) a distinction is made between the following
CTPs:

AU4 (au4 Connection Termination Point)

The AU-4CTP represents both the creation and termination of an STM-1 connection.
The High-order Connection Supervision (HCS) function is included.

TU-x (Connection Termination Point), e.g. TU-12CTP, TU-2CTP,TU-3CTP

The TU-x CTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-x connection.
The Low-order Connection Supervision (LCS) function is included.

CTPs on PDH level


On PDH level (see Figure 143. ), a distinction is made between the following
CTPs:

E4 (Connection Termination Point)


The E4-CTP represents the non-intrusive monitoring of incoming 140
Mbit/s PPI

S4 (Connection Termination Point)


The S4-CTP represents the non-intrusive monitoring of outgoing 140
Mbit/s PPI

E32 (Connection Termination Point)

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

183 of 308

The E32-CTP represents the non-intrusive monitoring of incoming 45


Mbit/s PPI

S32 (Connection Termination Point)


The S32-CTP represents the non-intrusive monitoring of outgoing 45
Mbit/s PPI

E31 (Connection Termination Point)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The E31-CTP represents represent the non-intrusive monitoring of


incoming 34 Mbit/s PPI
S31 (Connection Termination Point)
The S31-CTP represents the non-intrusive monitoring of outgoing 34
Mbit/s PPI

E1 ( Connection Termination Point)


The E1-CTP represents the non-intrusive monitoring of incoming 2
Mbit/s PPI. The Mon. (monitoring) label indicates that is possible to
enable the CRC4 control signal.

S1 ( Connection Termination Point)


The S1-CTP represents the non-intrusive monitoring of outgoing 2 Mbit/s
PPI. The Mon. (Monitoring) label indicates that is possible to enable the
CRC4 control signal.

TTPs on SDH level


On SDH level (see Figure 162.) a distinction is made between the following
TTPs:

ES (Electrical Section TTP)


An ESTTP displays the physical characteristics of a port with electrical
access (level and code monitoring and conversion).

OS (Optical Section TTP)


An OSTTP displays the physical characteristics of a port with optical
access (level and code monitoring and conversion).

RST (Regenerator Section TTP)


An RSTTP displays the creation and/or termination of an RSOH
(Regenerator Section Overhead), i.e., rows 1 to 3 of the first 9xN
columns of an STM-N frame.

MST (Multiplexer Section TTP)

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

184 of 308

An MSTTP displays the creation and/or termination of an MSOH


(Multiplexer Section Overhead), i.e., rows 5 to 9 of the first 9xN columns
of an STM-N frame.

VC-4 (Trail Termination Point)


A VC-4 TTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-4
path.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

TTPs on PDH level


On PDH level (see Figure 163. ) a distinction is made between the following
TTPs:

PPI (Trail Termination Point)


On the PDH side, a PPITTP corresponds to the ESTTP of the synchronous
side. Depending on the type, it can either display the characteristics
of a 140 Mbit/s, a 45 Mbit/s, a 34 Mbit/s or a 2 Mbit/s port.

P (pPI Trail Termination Point)

On the PDH side, a pPITTP corresponds to the esTTP of the synchronous side.
Depending on the type, it can either display the characteristics of a 140 Mbit/s, a
45MBit/s, a 34 Mbit/s or a 2 Mbit/s port.

E4 (Trail Termination Point)


The E4-TTP represents the creation and/or termination of a 140 Mbit/s
connection.

E3 (Trail Termination Point)


The E3-TTP represents the creation and/or termination of a 34 Mbit/s
connection.

E2 ( Trail Termination Point)


The E2-TTP represents the creation and/or termination of a 8 Mbit/s
connection.

VC-4 ( Trail Termination Point)


A VC-4 TTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-4
path.

VC-3 ( Trail Termination Point)


A VC-3 TTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-3
path.

VC-12 ( Trail Termination Point)

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

185 of 308

A VC-12 TTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-12


path.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

- MSP definition
Transmit side, the MSNP (AU4-CTP) input enters two different MSNP/MSN (unProcted
CTP) sources and then the MSN-TTP working and protection sources (to insert the
K1-K2 bytes) are sent to the own SPI interfaces. Receive side, the working and
protection MSN/MSNP outputs (AU4-CTP) enter in the switching selector. The MSNPTTP terminates the selected signal and checks the SSF and the MSP protocol
failure.

Figure 142 SDH Transport Level Diagram

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

186 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 143 PDH Transport Level Diagram


13.1.4 Mapping Tables: TP Names
The TP names on the 1642EMC reflect the software model the user interface is
based on. Therefore they differ from the TP names given in the ITU-T
recommendations. The following tables list the TP names mapping conventions in
the "Transmission" View.
Table 3. PDH TPs
ITU-T
TP names on 1642EMC
PPITTP
P
E4 CTP
eCTP
S4 CTP
p4
E31 CTP
eCTP
S31 CTP
p31
E32 CTP
eCTP
S32 CTP
p32
E1 CTP
eCTP
S1 CTP
p12Mon
E4 TTP
not supported
E3 TTP
not supported
E2 TTP
not supported
VC-4 TTP
Vc4
VC-3 TTP
Vc3
VC-12 TTP
Vc12
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

187 of 308

ITU-T
ESTTP
OSTTP
RSTTP
MSTTP
MSP
AU-4 CTP
AU-4-4c CTP
VC-4 TTP
TUG-3
TUG-2
TU-3 CTP
TU-2 CTP
TU-12 CTP

TP names on 1642EMC
ElS
OpS
RST
MST
MSP
Au4/Au4P
Au4P-4c
Vc4
Tug3
Tug2
Tu3
Tu2
Tu12

13.1.5 Cross-Connection Types


A cross-connection represents the logical connection between the input and
output of the matrix, called the matrix port.
The matrix only receives and transmits signals in GTI format. The Generic Transport
Interface GTI, Alcatel's standardized signal format for internal interfaces, is similar to
the STM-1 format. The incoming signals are mapped or converted to GTI format on
the plesiochronous and synchronous I/O boards. This frame is based on the STM-1
frame specified by ITU-T Recommendation G.707. It enables the transport of all
signals in the US hierarchy and ETSI hierarchy levels 1 to 4 (1.5 Mbit/s to 140 Mbit/s)
mapped to Virtual Containers (VCs) (see Figure 160. ).
The VCs are sent from the I/O boards to both copies of the Matrix (A and B) via the
GTI. The matrix performs the cross-connection on the VC-4, VC-3, VC-2 or VC-12
level and transfers the VCs to the relevant I/O boards via GTI. The configuration of
both matrix copies is always identical. On the I/O boards, one GTI signal is selected
from Copy A or Copy B, based on quality.
The NE supports unidirectional, bidirectional and broadcast connections
unprotected as well as protected.
13.1.5.1 Unidirectional Connection
Information is transmitted exclusively from the input port to the output port (pointto-point); there is no routing in reverse direction.

Figure 144 Unidirectional Connection

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

188 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Table 4. SDH TPs

13.1.5.2 Bidirectional Connection


Information is transmitted between input port and output port in both directions
(point-to-point).

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 145 Bidirectional Connection


13.1.5.3 Broadcast Connection (Multi-leg / Multipoint)
In contrast to a cross-connection between just two points (point-to-point), one
source and one sink, a broadcast connection consist of one source and several
sinks, different `legs' that share the same source TP.
In the example below, information is broadcast from one input to outputs A, B and
C on three legs.

Figure 146 Example of Broadcast Connection with Three Legs


A warning box indicates when the resources available for broadcast connections
are exhausted.
N.B. Non-intrusive Monitoring
Adding a protection leg to a unidirectional cross-connection offers the ability to
perform non-intrusive monitoring on this cross-connection. No errors are introduced
to the original cross-connection with applying or removing the protection leg.
13.1.6 Cross-Connection Protection
13.1.6.1 Protected Unidirectional Connection
A unidirectional connection is routed from Input A to the Output (primary route). In
the case of a failure, the system automatically switches to the protection path
from protection Input B to the Output. This second connection is permanently kept
in hot standby operation (see Figure 147. ).
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

189 of 308

N.B. By means of this connection are created links with SNCP protection.
13.1.6.2 Protected Bidirectional Connection
A bidirectional connection is routed from Input A to the Output C (primary route).
Input A (input protected - see Figure 148.) can be protected:

Figure 148 Bidirectional Connection - Input Protected


N.B. By means of this connection are created links with SNCP protection.
13.1.6.3 Protected Broadcast Connection
The protected broadcast is realized as a set of independent, protected,
unidirectional connections using the same pair of input termination points, as
illustrated in Figure 149. Each protection can be forced, locked out or switched
independently. Therefore, if a failure occurs at a certain input, it is possible that
only some of the protections of the protected broadcast actually switch to the
protection input.

Figure 149 Protected Broadcast


01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

190 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 147 Bidirectional Connection - Input Protected

Figure 149. shows a broadcast connection from input A to outputs A, B and C. Leg
2 and 3 are protected via input B, whereas leg 1 is not protected.
In current release only one out of N legs can be protected.
13.1.6.4 Drop and Continue Connection

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

A Drop and Continue connection is a composed by: (see Figure 150. )

a unidirectional connection routed from Input A to the Output C and also to


Input protecting B.

a unidirectional connection from Input protecting B to Output C.

a unidirectional connection from Output C to Input A.

Output C is protected; when receive from Input main the connection is


defined normal, when receive from Input Protecting main the connection is
defined inverse.
All the connections are created in a single step of configuration.

Figure 150 Drop and Continue - Normal


13.2 Operative Sequence to execute Cross-Connections
This paragraph lists general procedure to realize cross-connection moving among
the various menus.
Three main cases have been considered:

an high order signal cross connection (AU4)

an high order concatenated signal cross connection (AU4c)

a low order signal cross connection (example : TU12)

Procedure for high order signal (AU4)

Select "Transmission" option from the "View" menu

Select "Transmission" " "Cross Connection" ""Cross Connection Management"

Click on "Create" in the Cross Connection Management windows; a new


window called "Main Cross Connection" is opened.
o

01
Edition
FCG - OND

Select the correct value in the fields "Type" and "Protection"


1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK
3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

191 of 308

Click on "Choose" relative to the "Input" field; a new window called "TP
search" is opened.
o

On the "Equipment" field select the Board, in the "Termination Points"


field select the AU4

Click on "OK"; the "TP search" window is closed.

In the "Main Cross Connection" window repeat the same on the "Output"
field and on the "Prot. Input" field for protected connections

Click on "OK" in the "Main Cross Connection" window to terminate the


creation and subsequently click on "Cancel" to go to the "Cross Connection
Management" window.

Click on "Search" in the "Cross Connection Management" window to see the


new cross-connection created.

Procedure for AU4 concatenated (AU4c)


Not operative in current release.
Procedure low order signal (example TU12)

Select "Transmission" option from the "View" menu

Select "Transmission" ""Add TP"; a new window called "Tp search" is opened.
o

On the "Equipment" field select the Board, In the "Termination Points"


field select the AU4 and click on "OK";

In the transmission window the AU4 block is displayed;

Select "Transmission" " "Terminate TP" ; a cross is displayed on the AU4 block

Click twice on the AU4 block and on the VC4 block that appears, then
selecting the showed TUG3

Select "Transmission" " "Structure TPs" " then selecting the structure

N.B. The AU4 is then terminated on a VC4 of the matrix circuit of the
COMPACT ADM unit.
The VC4 is automatically chosen and indicated as "port # n", where "n" is the VC4
number.
This connection will appear on the Cross Connection Management view in a
independent line.

If TU12 (example) are selected, in the transmission window clicking twice on


the TUG3 and TUG2 blocks the TU12 are displayed

Select the TU12 to be used

Select "Transmission" " "Cross Connection" " "Cross Connection


Management"; a new window called "Cross Connection Management" is
opened.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

192 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

In the "Cross Connection Management" window click on "Create" button; a


new window called "Main Cross Connection" is opened.
o

Click on "Choose" relative to the "Input" field; a new window called "TP
search" is opened.
o

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Select the correct value in the fields "Type" and "Protection"

On the "Equipment" field select the Board, In the "Termination Points"


field select the structured TP (example: TU12 1.1.1)

Click on "OK"; the "TP search" window is closed.

Repeat the same on the "Output" field and on the "Prot. Input" field for
protected connections

Click on "OK" in the "Main Cross Connection" window to terminate the


creation and subsequently click on "Cancel" to go to the "Cross Connection
Management" window.

Click on "Search" in the "Cross Connection Management" window to see the


new cross-connection created.

13.3 Cross-Connections management


A list of cross-connections can be displayed in the Cross-Connection Management
dialog (see
Figure 151.). The dialog can be accessed via the Transmission or Port view or via
Configuration menu as indicated in Figure 151.
Transmission view is presented with the View " Transmission pull down menu.
Port view is presented with the View " Equipment pull down menu, then clicking on
the presented objects with the sequence board>port.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

193 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 151 Cross connection management cascade menu


The Cross-Connection Management dialog is initially empty.
A list of cross-connections is displayed in the Cross-Connection Management
dialog after selecting the Search command.
There are two possibilities of displaying a list of cross-connections:

do not enter any search criteria and press the Search button to display a list
of all existing cross-connections,

enter Search Criteria (one or more) and then press the Search button to
display a selection of cross-connections. Set Ignore for attributes not to be
used as filtering criteria.

Use button Cancel Search to cancel an active search request or close the dialog.
13.3.1 Search Criteria

Name (not supported.)


Number of the cross-connection (automatically assigned)

ACD (not supported.)

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

194 of 308

Enter the Access Control Domain of the relevant cross-connections: E=


connection made with 1353SH, M= connection made with 1354RM, empty=
connection made with CT.
This filter option can only be used, if at least one ACD is defined on the NE
and one or more cross-connections are assigned to this ACD(s).

Type

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Select the connection type:

Unidirectional

Bidirectional

Multipoint

Drop&Continue

Protection
Select protection functionality:

Protected

Not protected

TP Class
Select one of the TP types involved in the requested cross-connection.

State
Select the connection state:

Activated

Deactivated (not operative in current release, the connection state is


always Activated)

Prot. State
Select the protection state:

Forced to Input

Forced to Protecting

Manual Switch to Input

Manual Switch to Protecting

Auto. Switch to Input

Auto. Switch to Protecting

Lockout

Normal I

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

195 of 308

Normal P

TP ID Prefix

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Enter the TP type and physical location of the port, or only the physical
location at least down to board level, according to the following format:
r<rack#>s<subr.#>b<board#>/port#<port#>-TP. (see Figure 152.)
The # within brackets identifies a number.

Figure 152 Cross-Connection Management Dialog (Initial State)


13.3.2 Cross-Connection List
After a successful search, a read only list of cross-connections matching the search
criteria appears. The number of matching cross-connections is displayed in the
upper left corner of the list. The list contains information concerning the following
parameters for each cross-connection:

Prot. State
Detailed switching information in the format:
<protection state> <traffic ind> (<location>:<signal state>-<switch status>,
[<location>:<signal state>-<switch status>])

<protection state>
Normal, Auto, Lockout, Forced. (Manual is not supported in current
release)

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

196 of 308

<traffic ind>
Indicates the location of current traffic:
P (Protecting input) or I (Input).

<location>
Indicates the location of the error signal:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

P (Protecting input) or I (Input)

<signal state>
Indicates the signal state: SD (Signal Degrade) or SF (Signal Failure), SD
is only operative on VC4 and MST.

<switch status>
Status of the switch:
c (completed) or p (pending)
Example:
Auto I (P:SD-c)
There has been an Automatic switch from the protecting input to the Input
where the traffic is currently located. The reason for the automatic switch
was Signal Degrade in the Protecting input. The switch was completed.

State
Connection state indicating whether cross-connection is A(activated) or
D(deactivated)

Dir.
Direction-related connection type:
uni(directional), bi(directional) or mp (multipoint), DCN (Drop & Continue
Normal) or DCI (Drop & Continue Inverse)

Input
Signal source; contains the TP type and physical location of the port
according to the format
<rack#>-<subr.#>-<board#>-<port#>,<port#>#TP
The # within brackets identifies a number.

Protecting Input
Protecting source (for protected cross-connections only); contains the TP
type and physical location of the port according to the format
r<rack#>s<subr.#>b<board#>/port#<port#>-TP.
The # within brackets identifies a number.

Output

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

197 of 308

Figure 153 Cross-Connection Management Dialog (After Search)

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

198 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Signal destination for point-to-point cross-connections, the TP ID of the


destination is specified according to the format
r<rack#>s<subr.#>b<board#>/port#<port#>-TP ; for multi-leg crossconnections, the string "multiple Legs" appears instead.
At the bottom of the dialog is a range of buttons to start actions on the listed crossconnections. Before starting any action apart from creation or printing, mark at
least one cross-connection.
To mark several cross-connections (multi-select) that are listed in succession, select
the first cross-connection of a block with a mouse click and the last one with a
mouse click while pressing the <Shift> key.
Or, mark a number of individual cross-connections by clicking the mouse button
while pressing the <Control> key.
Deselect cross-connections by clicking on the respective row while simultaneously
pressing the <Control> key. To deselect a number of cross-connections at a time,
press the <Shift> key and hold it down while moving the mouse pointer to the last
entry.
All actions that may affect traffic must be confirmed. A confirmation dialog pops
up in this case and the user has to confirm the requested action.

13.3.3 Actions available


The following actions are available:

Create a cross-connection.
The Main Cross-Connection dialog is opened.

Modify a Cross-Connection.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Available if just one cross-connection is selected from the list. The Main
Cross-Connection dialog is opened.

Activate a Cross-Connection.
Available if at least one cross-connection is selected from the list. Not
operative.

Deactivate a Cross-Connection.
Available if at least one cross-connection is selected from the list. Not
operative.

Delete a Cross-Connection.
Available if at least one cross-connection is selected from the list.

Split a Cross-Connection.
Available if at least one bidirectional cross connection is selected from the
list.

Join Cross-Connections.
Available if two cross connections are selected. Not operative.

Protection Switching.
Available if exactly one protected cross-connection is selected from the list.
The Protection Actions dialog is opened.

Print.

Prints the filtered list of cross-connections.


The dialog has to be closed explicitly.
13.4 Create/Modify Cross-Connections
Creation and modification of cross-connections are performed in the Main CrossConnection dialog. The dialog can be accessed via the Transmission or Port view
as for the following menus example or by using the Create or Modify buttons in the
Cross-Connection Management dialog.
(See Figure 154.)
The dialog box of Figure 154. is presented ( Main Cross Connection view).

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

199 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 154 Open Menu to Create Cross Connections


To prevent operation faults, the system is designed according to the following
guidelines:

All operations that may affect traffic must be confirmed. The subsystem
provides a confirmation dialog box before the operation can be executed.

If the window displays an existing cross-connection, the OK button is


insensitive when this cross-connection is assigned to NML or it is not assigned
to the user profile.

If the window is used to create a new cross-connection, the system verifies


that the relevant TPs can be used (not assigned to NML and assigned to the
user profile) after the OK button is pressed. If a specified TP is not permitted,
the corresponding message box appears.

13.4.1 Cross-Connection Parameters


The "Main Cross Connection" permits to create the cross connections.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

200 of 308

A cross-connection is defined through a set of parameters, which depend on the


connection and protection type. Only those parameters, which are permitted
within the current context, can be accessed. All others are disabled (faded gray).
To create a cross-connection, one or more of those parameters must be defined
according to the cross-connection type. Table 1. gives an overview about the
optional and mandatory input parameters for the various cross-connection types.
Activate the relevant entry boxes first of all by clicking on them with the mouse.
Configurable Parameters
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Type
Select the connection type:

Unidirectional

Bidirectional

Drop & Continue

D&C Topology
Select the direction for Drop & Continue:

Normal

Inverse

Protection
Define protection state:

Protected

Not Protected

Prot. Criteria (only available for protected connections)


Clicking on the Prot. Criteria button, for the Protection Criteria dialog is
opened, where the user can display and configure the SNCP Type
Protection. No protection criteria for automatic protection switching can be
configured.
The following SNCP Types are available:

SNCP-I (Inherently monitored Sub-Network Connection Protection)

SNCP-N (Non-intrusively monitored Sub-Network Connection Protection) (Not


operative in current release)

SNCP-S (Sub-layer Sub-Network Connection Protection) (Not operative in


current release)

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

201 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 155 Protection Criteria

Revertive (available only for protected connections)


Select whether protection is revertive or not.
In Revertive mode, a protected service is switched back to its initial,
protected element when the fault has been eliminated.
When Revertive mode is active, the Wait To Restore protection period
prevents several protection switches being initiated as a result of an
intermittent failure. The protected element must be error-free during this
defined period of time before a protected service is switched back to it.
The Wait To Restore time period is fixed to 5 minutes.
In Non-revertive mode, switchover to the protecting element is maintained
even after the fault has been eliminated.

HOT (available only for protected connections) Not operative in current


release
To enter the Hold Off Time expressed in msec. HOT is the time between
declaration of Signal Degrade or Signal Fail, and the initialization of
the protection switching algorithm.

Input
To enter the input TP, click the relevant Choose button and select the TP in
the TP Search dialog. Otherwise, select the input field and enter the name of
the TP directly.

Prot. Input

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

202 of 308

To enter the protecting TP, click the relevant Choose button and select the
TP in the TP Search dialog. Otherwise, select the input field and enter the
name of the TP directly.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Output

It is possible to enter one or more output TPs.


To enter one output TP, click the relevant Choose button and select the TP in
the TP Search dialog. Otherwise, select the input field and enter the name of
the TP directly.
To enter more than one output TP and create a broadcast connection,
proceed as described previously and press button Add afterwards. The
previously chosen TP is then moved to the list box located below. Click the
Choose button and select the next TP in the TP Search dialog. Otherwise,
select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly. Repeat this
procedure for each destination TP. A list of all the selected output TPs is
displayed in the list box located below it.
To delete a leg from the list, select the TP in the list box and click on the
Delete Leg button.
N.B. Non-intrusive Monitoring
Adding a protection leg to a unidirectional cross-connection offers the
ability to perform non-intrusive monitoring on this cross-connection. No errors
are introduced to the original cross-connection with applying or removing
the protection leg.
Table 5. Optional and Mandatory Configurable Parameters for Cross-Connection
Creation

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

203 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Non-configurable Parameters

CC Topology
The topology of the cross-connection is indicated via two icons. The lefthand icon displays the current topology and the right one displays a view of
the topology following confirmation of the current modifications.
In addition, the colour of an icon indicates the connection state of the crossconnection:
Green -> active
Brown -> inactive
The icon is set according to the entries made in Type and Protection:

TPs not cross-connected

Unidirectional, not protected

Bidirectional, not protected


01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

204 of 308

Unidirectional, protected

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Bidirectional, protected

Broadcast, not protected

Broadcast with one protected leg

Drop & Continue normal

Drop & Continue inverse

Loopback connection: unidirectional, same input and output TP


Figure 156 Cross-Connection Icons
Example:

Figure 157 Creation of a Unidirectional, Non-Protected Cross-Connection


-- Input TTI
The received Trail Trace Identifier of the far end signal is displayed. Not operative in
the current release.
-- Output TTI
The Trail Trace Identifier of the transmitted (near end) signal is displayed. Not
operative in the current release.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

205 of 308

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

206 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

13.4.2 Create a Cross-Connection


This chapter lists the steps the user has to take to create a cross-connection using
The "Main Cross Connection"
For a detailed description of the single parameters.
For information on cross-connection types.
N.B. After creation of a cross-connection, the cross-connection list in the Cross
Connection Management dialog is not automatically updated. Use button Search
in this dialog to update the list.
Create a Point-to-Point Cross-Connection (uni- or bidirectional)
1 ) Select the cross-connection type.
2 ) Select the protection state.
3 ) Select or type in the input TP.
To enter the TP, click the Choose button and select the TP in the Search for
Cross Connection Input dialog, or select the input field and enter the name
of the TP directly.
The Search for Cross Connection Input dialog offers the possibility to list TPs
according to different filter criteria. E.g. to obtain a list of all not connected AU-4
TPs of a rack, first select the rack in the left list box, then select the filter criteria
ConnectionState "not connected" and Class "AU-4" and click on button Search.
The matching TPs are listed in the right listbox. Select the input TPs in the list and
confirm with Ok.
For a more detailed description on the Search for Cross Connection.
4 ) Select or type in the output TP as described in Step 3 ).
The following steps only apply to protected cross-connections:
5 ) Select or type in the protection TP as described in Step 3 ).
6 ) Configure the Revertive mode
7 ) Configure the Protection Criteria (Prot. Criteria)
8 ) The Hot (Hold Off Time) is not operative in current release
Press the button Ok to confirm the creation.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 158 Create a Bidirectional Protected Cross-Connection


Create a Broadcast Connection
1 ) Select the cross-connection type "unidirectional"
2 ) Select the protection state.
3 ) Select or type in the input TP.
To enter the TP, click the Choose button and select the TP in the Search for Cross
Connection Input dialog or select the input field and enter the name of the TP
directly.
This dialog offers the possibility to list TPs according to different filter criteria. E.g. to
obtain a list of all TU12 TPs of a board, first select the board in the left list box, then
select the filter criteria Connection State "Ignore" and Class "TU12" and click on
button Search TPs. The matching TPs are listed in the right listbox. Select the input
TPs in the list and confirm with Ok.
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

207 of 308

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

208 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

For a more detailed description on the Search for Cross Connection.


4 ) Select or type in the output TPs as described in Step 3 )
Press the button Add Leg in the Main Cross Connection dialog and all output
TPs are displayed in the list box under the output field.
To delete a leg from the list, select the TP in the list box and click on the
Delete Leg button.
The following steps only apply to protected broadcast connections:
5 ) Select or type in the protection input TP. Note that each single protected leg of
the broadcast has to be assigned to the same protecting input.
Proceed as described in Step 3 ). Afterwards, select the protected output TP
in the output list box and click button Protect Leg. The leg is then marked as
"protected" in the list box. Repeat this procedure for each protected output
TP (only one protected leg is supported in current release).
To unprotect a leg from the list, select the protected TP in the list box and
click on the Unprotect Leg button.
6 ) Configure the criteria for automatic protection switching.
7 ) Configure the Protection Criteria (Prot. Criteria)
8 ) The HOT (Hold Off Time) is not operative in current release
Press the button Ok to confirm creation.

Figure 159 Search for Cross-Connection Input

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK

3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

209 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 160 Create an Unprotected Broadcast Cross-Connection

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK

3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

210 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 161 Create a Protected Broadcast Cross-Connection

13.4.3 Modify a Cross-Connection


When modifying a cross-connection, note that some of the transformations
involved may affect traffic (because the system may have to destroy and recreate the cross-connection to perform the necessary transformation). As
mentioned at the beginning of this chapter, the user is required to confirm
operations affecting traffic, i.e. a confirmation window warns the user.
Within the Main Cross Connection dialog, modification of a cross-connection is
restricted to the protection state and the parameters required by the protection.
Refer to Table 2. for an overview of the accessible parameter when the protection
state has been changed from "not protected" to "protected" and vice versa. For a
description of the parameters, please refer to the previous para. 1.1.1 on page 2.
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

211 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

To modify a cross connection, select one from the connection list and then click
on the Modify button.
N.B. After modification of a cross-connection, the cross-connection list in the Cross
Connection Management dialog is not automatically updated. Use button Search
in this dialog to update the list.
Table 6. Modifiable Parameters

The following few facts should be taken into consideration when modifying
connections.
Unprotect a protected cross-connection: (see Figure 162. ):
When a protected cross-connection is being unprotected (protection
changed to "not protected"), the dialog displays the additional option
button Unprotected.
It offers the choice of whether to keep the protected input TP (Input) or the
protecting input TP (Prot. Input) as the only signal source of the new
unprotected cross-connection. Ensure that the active TP is selected (i.e.
check the protection state in the Cross-Connection Management dialog).
An example is in the following Figure 162.
In addition, a question box appears, asking the user to confirm the
unprotect action.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

212 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 162 Unprotect a Unidirectional Cross-Connection

Protect an unprotected cross-connection:


When an unprotected cross-connection is being protected, the Prot. Input
button is available to select the protection input connection to insert.
An example is in the following Figure 163.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

213 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 163 Protect one Leg of a Broadcast Connection


13.5 Activate/Deactivate/Delete Cross-Connections
13.5.1 Activate a Cross-Connection
Not supported in current release.
The Cross Connection Management dialog provides the possibility of displaying a
selection of existing cross-connections. The connection state (Act = A or D) is
indicated in this connection list.
To activate a cross-connection, select one from the connection list and then click
on the Activate button to initiate the process. A confirmation box appears in which
to confirm the state change request. The connection in the list is automatically
updated to indicate the new connection state (Act = A).
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

214 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

If the set of cross-connections selected from the list includes both activated and
deactivated cross-connections, clicking the Activate button only initiates actions
on the deactivated cross-connections, which were selected.
13.5.2 Deactivate a Cross-Connection
Not supported in current release.
After creation, a cross-connection is automatically in an active state. To
deactivate a cross-connection, select one from the connection list and then click
on the Deactivate button to initiate the process. A confirmation box appears in
which to confirm the state change request. The connection in the list is
automatically updated to indicate the new connection state (Act = D).
If the set of cross-connections selected from the list includes both activated and
deactivated cross-connections, clicking the Deactivate button only initiates
actions on the activated cross-connections, which were selected.
13.5.3 Delete a Cross-Connection
Only deactivated cross-connections should be deleted. However, deletion of
active cross-connections is possible.
To delete a cross-connection, select the corresponding connection from the list
and click on the Delete button. To prevent operation errors, the user must confirm
the deletion request.
The deleted cross-connection automatically disappears from the connection list
when the operation is successful.
13.6 Split and Join Cross-Connections
13.6.1 Split a Cross-Connection
Precondition
Only bidirectional cross-connections can be split.
Split
Select one or more bidirectional cross connections from the list in the Cross
Connection Management dialog and press Split. The cross-connections are split
without further confirmation from the user.
The original cross connection(s) disappear from the list in the Cross Connection
Management dialog after a successful action. The user has to press Search to see
the new cross connections.
Depending on the protection state of the original cross-connection, the split
action has the following effect:
a ) Unprotected Cross-Connection
An unprotected bidirectional cross-connection is split into two unidirectional
cross-connections with the input TP in one of them being the output in the
other and vice versa (see Figure 164. ).
The new cross connection has the same name and activation status as the
old bidirectional one.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

215 of 308

b ) Protected Cross-Connection
Splitting a protected connection results in one protected unidirectional
cross-connection and one broadcast with two legs. The input of the original
cross-connection is one of the legs in the broadcast. The other leg in the
broadcast is the protecting input. The input of the broadcast is the output of
the original protected cross-connection.

Figure 165 Split/Join to Protected Bidirectional Cross-Connection


13.6.2 Join Two Cross-Connections
Precondition
Two cross-connections can be joined if they match the following characteristics:

The connections are either


1 ) both unprotected, unidirectional and the input is the output of the
other one, or
2 ) one of them is protected and unidirectional, and the other one a
broadcast with two legs. Restriction: the input of the broadcast
connection has to be the output of the protected connection and
the legs of the broadcast match the input and the protection input of
the unidirectional connection, also refer to Chapter Split a CrossConnection, effect b).

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

216 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 164 Split/Join Unprotected Bidirectional Cross-Connection

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Both cross-connections have the same connection state (activated or


deactivated).

Both cross-connections have the operational state "enabled", i.e. they are
listed in black colour in the Cross Connection Management dialog.

Join
Select exactly two cross connections in the Cross Connection Management dialog
and press the Join button. The cross-connections are joined without further
confirmation from the user.
The original cross connection(s) disappear from the list in the Cross Connection
Management dialog after a successful action. Press Search to see the new crossconnections in the list.
The result is either a bidirectional (case 1, see Figure 164.) or a protected
bidirectional (case 2, see Figure 165.) cross-connection.
If the original cross-connections have different names, the new name is a
concatenation of the names of both of them.
13.7 Protection Switching
The Protection Actions dialog is displayed after clicking on the Protection button in
the Cross Connection Management dialog.
Users can only switch protection on cross-connections belonging to them and not
assigned to the NML. A second condition is that protection is enabled for the crossconnection concerned (protection parameter is set to "protected").
The three protection actions Force, Lock Out and Manual Switch belong to
different levels, whereby Lock has the highest priority and Manual Switch the
lowest.
Note that a protection state can only be changed within the same or from a
higher priority level, e.g. Force To Protecting can be reverted with Release but not
with Manual Switch To Input.

Figure 166 Protection Actions Dialog


01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

217 of 308

The dialog window enables the user to perform protection- related operations on
protected cross-connections. These are:

Force to Input (not operative in current release)


The cross-connection is switched to the protected input regardless of signal
quality. Automatic protection is disabled.
Force to Protecting (Input)
The cross-connection is switched to the protecting input regardless of signal
quality. Automatic protection is disabled.

Release Force
Forced switching is disabled and automatic protection switching reenabled.

Manual Switch to Input (not operative in current release)


The user can switch over to the protected input manually. Switching over is
not executed if the signal quality on the protected path is worse than on the
protecting path.

Manual Switch to Protecting Input (not operative in current release)


The user can switch over to the protecting input manually. Switching over is
not executed if the signal quality on the protecting path is worse than on the
protected path.

Release Manual Switch (not operative in current release)


A manual switch is disabled and automatic protection switching re-enabled.

Lock Out to Invoke


The connection path is locked for protection switching, i.e. neither forced
nor manual switching can be performed.

Release Lock

The protection lock is disabled.


N.B. All the operations listed are context-dependent and are enabled or disabled
("grayed") accordingly.
After completion of protection switching, the list entry in the Cross Connection
Management dialog is updated automatically.
After clicking on an action button and completing the action initiated, the dialog
disappears automatically.
13.8 Print
This option is used to print the currently filtered cross-connection list and the
related filter settings on the default printer or to a file in postscript or ASCII format.
(see Figure 167. and Figure 168. )

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

218 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 167 Select Printer


N.B. If no printer is installed, there is no error message displayed to indicate this.

Figure 168 Select Output Format


13.9 Show Cross-Connected TPs
An overview of signal flow can be requested by means of a user action. The user
can select a TP and initiate the action Show Cross Connected TPs from the
Transmission view.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

219 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 169 Show Cross Connected TPs


The result is that all other TPs connected to the currently selected TP are displayed
(see the example of Figure 170. ). A line indicates the connection.
This functionality should only be applied selectively (either for a single TP or
selected group of TPs). Expanding and hiding TPs that are associated with the
currently selected TP (e.g. show all TPs that are above the TU12CTP) enables all the
related TPs to be added to the view so that the complete signal flow can be
illustrated.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

220 of 308

Figure 170 Show Cross Connected VC4 of an AU4

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK

3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

221 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

14. Overhead management


Not supported in current release.

The purpose of this set of dialogs is to handle the operations on the Overhead (OH)
bytes of the NE.
The possible operations are:

Overhead cross-connection
- Cross-connection between 2 or more OH bytes
- Termination of an OH byte onto an auxiliary port or vocal channel
- Total Pass-through of the MSOH bytes for some cards
- Definition of the Phone Parameters

There is a TP associated to every OH byte and to every auxiliary port, so TP could


be used instead of OH bytes or auxiliary port, depending on the context.
14.2 OH Connection overview
Here are described the possible OH connections

OH Cross-connection

The operator has to be able to cross-connect 2 or more OH bytes on 2 different


boards.
The possible cross-connection types are:

unprotected bidirectional point to point

The steps an operator has to do in order to perform the cross-connection are the
following:

create the OH TPs involved in the operation

create the OH cross-connection:


- select type of cross-connection
- select the input OH TP involved in the operation
- select the output OH TP involved in the operation

After having deleted an OH cross-connection, the involved TPs have to be


deleted.

OH Termination

The operator has to be able to terminate one OH byte onto an auxiliary port or
vocal channel.
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

222 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

14.1 Introduction

The steps an operator has to do in order to perform the OH bytes termination are
the following:

create the OH TP involved in the operation

create the OH byte termination:


- select the created OH TP

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

- select the auxiliary port/vocal channel TP involved in the operation


After having deleted an OH byte termination, the involved TP have to be deleted.

Total MSOH Pass-through

For STM ports it make sense to allow the operator to perform a total pass-through
of the MSOH bytes. A total MSOH pass-through connection (connection between
msPassThroughCTP points) is set-up only if no single MSOH pass-through connection
is set and if no single MSOH cross-connection are set. If a total MSOH pass-through
connection is set, a single MSOH pass-through connection or a single MSOH crossconnection cannot be set.
The steps an operator has to do in order to perform the total MSOH pass-through
are the following:

create the msPassThroughCTP points involved in the operation

create the total MSOH pass-through:


- select the input msPassThroughCTP point involved in the operation
- select the output msPassThroughCTP point involved in the operation

After having deleted a total MSOH pass-through, the involved msPassThroughCTP


points have to be deleted.
14.3 Overhead views
The Overhead Views allows performing the previously presented operations.
To access select Overhead option from the Configuration pull down menu; the
following options are presented in the cascading menu.

OH Cross Connection.

OH Phone Parameters.

OH TP creation.

OH TP deleting.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

223 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 171 Overhead options


The options are described in next paragraphs.
14.4 OH Cross Connection
Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Overhead option and then
from the cascading menu the OH Cross Connection option.
The Cross-Connection Management for Overheard dialog opens(see Figure 172.)
and allows to start the configuration.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

224 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 172 Cross Connection Management for Overhead dialog


It is similar to the dialog used for the cross-connection of the TP for paths, then the
same description and functions are valid.
Next configuration steps use the Main Cross-Connection for Overhead dialog (see
Figure 173.) and the TP Search dialog, also in this case already described for path
management.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

225 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 173 Main Cross-Connection for OverHead dialog


There is one big difference between the OH TPs and the other kinds of TPs: the OH
TPs have to be:

created ONLY BEFORE a cross-connection/termination operation involving


them has been performed.

deleted AFTER a cross-connection/termination deleting involving them has


been confirmed.

The current implementation of the TP Search Dialog (TPSD) works only with created
TPs.
In the following a description of the main functions and commands is given, also to
list the Supported and Not Supported operation.
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

226 of 308

14.4.1 Cross-Connection Management for Overhead dialog

Supported operations

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Search cross connections/terminations according to one or more of


the following filtering attributes: type, TPs . The operator can set the
filtering criteria, can start the search and select one or more cross
connections/terminations among those presented in a read-only list as
a result of the search operation. For each crossconnection/termination matching the filtering criteria, the following
information is shown: direction (bidirectional) and the input, output TPs
involved ;

After choosing one or more cross connections/terminations, this dialog


allows to:

Delete the selected xconnection/termination

Go to the "Main Cross Connection for OverHead" dialog and modify the
existing cross connection/termination

Note: this dialog disappears only when the user explicitly clicks on the close button.
Delete operations can be performed on several cross connections/termination at
the same time.
Modify operations can be performed only on single cross
connections/terminations.
The OH xconnections are automatically active at the moment of their creation.
The operation buttons availability follows some rules:

The Delete and Print buttons are enabled only if at least one item is selected
from the list.
A special dialog will ask the user for a confirmation.

the modify button is enabled if one (and only one) item is selected. It brings
up the Main cross-connection dialog.

the create button is always enabled. It brings up the Main cross-connection


Dialog.

When some operation may affect the existing traffic, the operator is warned about
that, and a confirmation dialog must be answered to carry on/cancel the
operation. The choices for this dialog are: yes/no for single items, yes to all/cancel
for multiple items

Not Supported operation

When used for OH purposes, the Cross-Connection Management dialog doesn't


support the following functionalities:

Protect cross connections/terminations: all the OH cross


connections/terminations are unprotected

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

227 of 308

Activate/Deactivate cross connections/terminations: all the OH cross


connections/terminations are automatically active since their creation

Split cross connection/termination

Modify Cross Connection Termination

See Figure 177.


According to the philosophy of offering only meaningful operations to the user,
and being the OH cross-connection operations a subset of those applying to the
general cross connections (e.g.: protections are not allowed), some fields of this
dialog are disabled.
By clicking on the proper portions of the dialog and on the proper buttons, the
operator can perform the operations hereafter listed:

selection of the cross-connection type

selection of the input TP involved in the cross-connection

selection of the output TP involved in the cross-connection

In order to do that the operator can either type in the involved TPs ID or use the TP
Search dialog.

Supported operations
o

When creating a new cross connection, some or all of the following


operations are available, depending on the NE type characteristics:

Choose one input TP

Choose one output TP


It is possible to directly type in the TP name or to click on
the Choose button to select a TP from the TP Search
dialog box

14.4.1.2 TP Search dialog


The TP Search dialog currently offers:

Navigation rack/subrack/board/port

A list of TPs to choose from

When used in the OH domain, this dialog is a subclass of the most generic TP
Search.
The operator can choose among a list of:

all the possible OH TPs belonging to a specified class: no board selected


and MS, RS or VC class selected

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

228 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

14.4.1.1 Main Cross-Connection for OverHead dialog

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

all the possible OH TPs belonging to a specified board/port: board/port


selected and no TP class selected

all the possible OH TPs belonging to a specified board/port and class:


board/port selected and MS, RS or VC class selected

all the OH TPs already connected (also accordingly to the connection type)

all the OH TPs not yet connected

a combination of the above options

In this Network Element to connect the auxiliary / vocal channels and the
Overhead bytes the following operative indication must be observed:
- The auxiliary and vocal channels TPs are in the SERVICE board of slot 1
The auxiliary channels are:

2 x G.703 2Mbit/s (not operative in current release); in the screen are


indicated as:
- r01sr1sl11/port#05-P
Expanding this TP, 31 referred TPs are presented
- r01sr1sl11/port#06-P
Expanding this TP, 31 referred TPs are presented

4 x G.703 64Kbit/s; in the screen are indicated as:


- r01sr1sl11/port#07-P
- r01sr1sl11/port#08-P
- r01sr1sl11/port#09-P
- r01sr1sl11/port#10-P

4 x V11; in the screen are indicated as:


- r01sr1sl11/port#01-#01-v11TTP
- r01sr1sl11/port#02-#01-v11TTP
- r01sr1sl11/port#03-#01-v11TTP
- r01sr1sl11/port#04-#01-v11TTP

4 x V24; in the screen are indicated as:


- r01sr1sl11/port#01-#01-v24TTP
- r01sr1sl11/port#02-#01-v24TTP
- r01sr1sl11/port#03-#01-v24TTP

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

229 of 308

- r01sr1sl11/port#04-#01-v24TTP

1 x phonic interface (voice channel); in the screen are indicated as:


r01sr1sl11/port#01-#01-q23TTP
Expanding this TP, four referred TPs are presented
- r01sr1sl11/port#01-#01-q23TTP

- r01sr1sl11/port#01-#03-q23TTP
- r01sr1sl11/port#01-#04-q23TTP
- The other boards used to terminate or cross-connect the OH bytes are the STMn boards.
14.4.2 The OH TP are present in MS, RS and VC4 TP Class.
In these TPs the indication ".....#0011 to 0099 (MS or RS) are referred to the
coordinates of the Section OverHead bytes on the SDH frame (1,1 to 9,9)
The voice channel are identified by the "ow" indication, the "FU" is for Future Use,
the "NU" is for National Use, "UC" is for User Channel and "Pass" is for Passthrough
channel.
The examples of the figure in this OH connection chapter can be helpful to the
operator
14.5 OH TP creation
Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Overhead option and then
from the cascading menu the OH TP creation option.
The OH TP creation dialog opens and allows to create the OH TP to cross connect.
In detail, the dialog-box contains the following graphical object:
- a Choose button is used to display a list of OH Tps to be created. The
Choose button starts the TP Search with predefined filtering; the TP
Search dialog allows the operator to visualize only not created OH Tps.
To visualize the OH TP in the TP Search view, double click on the MS, RS
or VC4 Tp.
- OH Tp field displays the label of the selected OH Tp to be created.
Apply button is used to perform a create request of the tp displayed in the OH Tp
field. After having performed the create request, the OH Tp field is set to empty.
Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.
Help button provides some useful information about the dialog.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

230 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

- r01sr1sl11/port#01-#02-q23TTP

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 174 OH TP creation

Figure 175 OH Search TP for creation

14.6 OH TP deleting

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

231 of 308

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Overhead option and then
from the cascading menu the OH TP deleting option.
The OH TP deleting dialog opens and allows to delete the OH TP no more involved
in an OH cross-connection.
In detail, the dialog-box contains the following graphical object:

- OH Tp field displays the label of the selected OH Tp to be deleted.


Apply button is used to perform a delete request of the tp displayed in the OH Tp
field. After having performed the delete request, the OH Tp field is set to empty.
Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.
Help button provides some useful information about the dialog.

Figure 176 OH TP deleting


14.7 OH Phone Parameters
The OH phone parameters option permits to configure the telephone number and
to manage the parameter "phonic extension".
Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Overhead option and then
from the cascading menu the OH Phone Parameters option. Figure 177. opens.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

232 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

- a Choose button is used to display a list of OH Tps to be deleted. The


Choose button starts the TP Search with predefined filtering; the TP
Search dialog allows the operator to visualize only created and not
cross-connected OH Tps.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 177 Phone Parameters dialog window


In the window are presented:

the interface field (at the top) where can be selected the phonic interfaces
to be configured.

the phone number field, to set the telephone number for operator call on
the phonic interface.

The phonic extension field, where enable or disable the extension of the
selected phonic interface.

If enabled the phonic signal is extended towards the external on the access
panel of the NE.
Not operative in current release
Apply button performs the configuration change of the modified phone
parameters of the selected phonic interface without close the dialog
Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

233 of 308

15. Performance Monitoring

The Performance Monitoring domain on the NE covers the monitoring of counter


values for trail termination points and connection termination points.
Examples of these counters are Error Seconds (ES) and Severely Error Seconds (SES).
The Performance Monitoring domain counts these errors during specified
granularity periods (15 min, 24h) and stores the values in history data logs.
For the purpose of quality supervision, the values of the error counters can be
compared to user-defined threshold levels. If a counter value has crossed a
threshold level, a notification (threshold crossing alarm) is issued.
The principle performance management functions are:

Configuration of the counting interval for each performance measurement


point.

Collection of the performance data.

Configuration of the quality thresholds that generate alarms and log records
when predefined values are exceeded.

15.1.1 Overview
These functionalities are described in the following chapters in addition to general
information concerning performance monitoring on the NE.

Chapter Configuration deals with the configuration of performance


monitoring

Chapter Display Current Data deals with displaying current performance


data

Chapter Display History Data deals with displaying history performance data

Chapter PM Threshold Table Selection deals with the selection of threshold


tables

Chapter PM Threshold Table Modification/Display deals with the


modification of threshold tables and permits of display the same

15.1.2 Supported Performance Counters


The NE uses performance counters to count transmission errors.
A set of performance counters is provided according to the Termination Point (TP),
where performance measurement occurs.
The user can start performance monitoring on one or more subsets of counters for
each TP; it is not possible to start individual performance counters.
Near end performance monitoring events are:
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

234 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

15.1 Introduction

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Background Block Error (BBE): A BBE counter measures the number of error
blocks which do not occur as part of an SES.

Error Second (ES): A one second period with one or more error blocks or with
a defect.

Severely Error Second (SES): A one second period which contains > 30% of
error blocks, or at least one Severely Disturbed Period (SDP). An SES is also
counted as an ES.

Near End Unavailable Second (NEUAS): An Unavailable Second is a second,


which is part of the Unavailable Time.

The corresponding Far End (FE) performance monitoring events are:

Far End Background Block Error (FEBBE): A far end error block, which does
not occur as part of an FESES.

Far End Error Second (FEES): Identifies, at a terminal, a one second period
with one or more error blocks or with a defect, which were received by the
Far End Terminal.

Far End Severely Error Second (FESES): Identifies, at a terminal, a one second
period which contains > 30% of error blocks, or at least one Severely
Disturbed Period (SDP) which was received/detected by the Far End
Terminal. An FESES is counted as FEES.

Far End Unavailable Second (FEUAS): An Unavailable Second is a second,


which is part of the Unavailable Time at the far end.

The Termination Point (TP) type determines which performance monitoring events
can be counted:
- SDH TPs
Both near end and far end counters are supported in receive
direction of the signal for all SDH path layers and for the multiplex
section layer. For the regenerator section, no far end information is
transmitted and, therefore, only near end counting is supported.
-

PDH TPs
Only near end counters are supported in receive direction for all PDH
path layers.

Further definitions:

Error Block (EB): A block in which one or more bits associated with the block
are erroneous.

Remote Error Indicator (REI) [formerly Far End Block Error (FEBE)]: Identifies, at
a terminal, the count of error blocks that were received by the far end
terminal.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

235 of 308

Remote Defect Indicator (RDI) [formerly Far End Receive Failure (FERF)]:
indicates to a terminal that the far end terminal has detected an incoming
failure.

Unavailable Time (UAT): A period of unavailable time begins at the onset of


10 consecutive SES events. These 10 seconds are considered to be part of
unavailable time. A new period of available time begins at the onset of 10
consecutive non-SES events.

Pointer Justification Event (PJE) : A PJE is an inversion of I- or D- bits of the


pointer, together with an increment or decrement of the pointer value to
signify a frequency justification.

Out of Frame Second (OFS): An AFS is defined as a second in which one or


more out of frame events have occurred. This event is identified by the
A1/A2 byte of the SDH Frame.
The counting of OFS i sonly supported for the regenerator section
termination. Please note that this counter is deprecated by ETSI and
will be removed from international standards.

15.1.3 Far End(FE) and Near End (NE) Performance Counting


Far end performance monitoring parameters are derived from Remote Defect
Indicators (RDI) and Remote Error Indicators (REI) (refer to Figure 178.).

Figure 178 Far End Performance Monitoring Principles

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

236 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

At Node A, the near end information represents the performance of the


unidirectional section/path from B to A, while the far end information
represents the performance of the unidirectional section/path from A to B.

At Node B, the near end information represents the performance of the


unidirectional section/path from A to B, while the far end information
represents the performance of the unidirectional section/path from B to A.

Near end performance data at Node A and far end performance data at Node B
correspond as long as neither direction is disturbed, and vice versa.
In compliance with ETSI and ITU-T standards, far end errors cannot be counted in
the case of near end failures.
15.1.4 Bidirectional Counting (24 h Bi) for QoS
As specified in G.826, G.784 and ETSI 300417, the bidirectional PM collection for
Quality of Service has been supported by combining the information on each
direction of transport to assess a single unavailability state: the bidirectional path is
in the unavailable state if either one or both directions are in the unavailable state.
PM data are collected by a single UAS plus two sets of three event counters
(BEE,ES,SES) for NE-PM and FE-PM respectively. When the path transports
unidirectional payload just the four counters for the NE-PM are activated (BEE, ES,
SES and UAS). Data collection is performed only on 24 hours registers and the NE
maintains a buffer of two registers: the 24hours current registers and the historical
one.
15.1.5 End to End (e-e 24h) Performance Counting
VCn trails can be monitored in intermediate node through the activation of
performance monitoring process on Monitoring function.
As the trails are often responsible of the end-to-end customer service, the end-toend monitoring can be requested provide monitoring for Quality of Service
purposes and, in addition, for network Maintenance applications.
If SNCP is configured the Quality of Service collection have to be enable in the
monitoring functions after the matrix.
End to end monitoring is achieved by activation of Performance monitoring on the
two direction of path and using far-end primitives. This process can be
unidirectional (for Monitoring) or bidirectional process (forQoS).
In case of unidirectional process one direction can be monitored end to end and
both 15minute and 24h collection can be activate 15min./24H FE_BBE_, FE-ES, FESES, FE-UAS on incoming or egress signal depending of the POM is enable. The TCA
are also evaluated in both 15 minute and 24H counters.
The bidirectional process need the presence on the two Monitoring functions in
the two directions in one NE and among the two monitoring function a 24 hour
collection can be activated with the collection of incFE_BBE, incFE-ES, incFE-SES,
UAS, eFE-BBE, eFE-es, eFE-SES.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

237 of 308

15.1.7 Tandem Connection Termination (TCT) and Monitoring (TCM)


Not operative in current release.
TCM allows monitoring within the operator domain. The quality within the
operator's on domain can be proven regardless of the received quality of the
signal at the entry point of the network. At the input point the reference value is set
to zero by using the TCM feature.
Tandem Connection Monitoring is applicable to VC-4-nc (n=1,4,16,...), VC-4, VC-3
and VC-12 layers.
TCM provides:
- Incoming error count (IEC)
- TC_REI to indicate error blocks within the TC to the far end;
- OEI to indicate error blocks of the regressing VC-n;
TC_API as access point identifier complying with generic 16-byte string format;
TC_RDI indicating to the far end that defects have been detected within the TC at
the near end TC sink;
15.1.8 Performance Data Collection
Near end and far end performance monitoring events are counted over fixed
monitoring periods of 15 minutes and 24 hours.
The 24-hour monitoring periods start at 00: 00 (UTC) and the 15-minute monitoring
periods start at xx : oo, xx : 30 and xx : 45.
Performance monitoring can be enabled and disabled at any time during a
monitoring period. An entity of all near end or far end performance monitoring
events is always counted; it is not possible to start individual performance counters
(e.g. SES only). BBE, ES and SES counting is stopped during Unavailable Time.
Event Counting
The performance events (e.g. SES) are counted in a counter per event. These
counters are called the current register. At the end of the monitoring period, the
contents of the current registers are transferred to the first of the recent registers,
together with a time stamp to identify the period (including the day). Time
stamping is performed using UTC (as for all alarms). After that, the current register is
reset. It is also possible to reset an individual current register manually.
Suspect Flag
A suspect interval flag is set as an indication that the data of the corresponding
register may be either incomplete or invalid.
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

238 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

15.1.6 Performance Monitoring on AU-PJE


AU PJE (Administrative unit point justification event) is an optional parameters
request in G.784.
For AU PJE counters, the positive and negative PJE shall be counted separately on
one selectable AU within an STM-N signal, after the AU has been resynchronized to
the local clock. Refer to G.783
The number of positive and negative outgoing PJE per second are collected in 15
minutes and 24 H counters. A history of 16 x 15minutes counters and 2 x 24H are
stored in the NE for each AU selected.
No Threshold crossing mechanism is supported on AU-PJE counters.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Zero Suppression
Not supported in current release.
Zero suppression is a basic mechanism to remove irrelevant PM information and to
reduce the amount of PM reports in the system. A PM report is suppressed and
hence no history record is created by the entity, which is responsible for PM
reporting when all of the following conditions are true for the monitoring period:
- an interval is error-free (all PM counter values are zero)
- PM was enable enabled during the entire monitoring interval (the elapsed time
equals its nominal value, i.e. 900 for 15 min. and 86400 for 24 h<9.
- PM was running properly (the suspect interval flag is not set)
By default, zero suppression is active for all PM enabled TPs. The number of
suppressed intervals is indicated.
15.1.9 Data Collection
N.B. PM data is not counted on boards that were plugged out at the moment of
enabling data collection (see PM Configuration dialog). Nevertheless, PM data is
counted on boards that were plugged in at the moment of enabling data
collection, but were plugged out and back in some time during data collection.
Performance Monitoring can be started at any time.
As soon as Performance Monitoring is started on the Craft Terminal, current PM
data is collected on the I/O boards, incrementing the performance counters each
time an error is detected.
The performance data counted is evaluated every quarter of an hour or every 24
hours and stored there in a history record.
When the user disables the monitoring of a TP within the first 10 minutes of a 15minute period, it is possible that have still not been received the PM data of the
previous monitoring interval.
Since PM data is not stored after monitoring is disabled, the PM data of the
previous interval is lost in this case.
If equipment or line protection switching occurs during a counting interval, the NE
does not provide complete performance measurement for the protected TPs.
Only the period between the last switch and the end of the counting window is
counted.
The interval is marked for suspect data and the elapsed time indicates the length
of the measured period.
15.1.10 Performance Monitoring History
Performance Monitoring history data is necessary to assess the recent
performance of transmission system. Such information can be used to sectionalize
faults and to locate the source of intermitted errors.
History data, in the form of performance monitoring event counts, is stored in
registers in the NE. All the history registers are time stamped.
In compliance with ETSI and ITU-T standards, the history registers operate as follows:
The history data is contained in a stack of registers. There are sixteen 15-minute
period registers and three 24-hour period registers per monitored event. These
registers are called the recent registers. At the end of each monitoring period, the
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

239 of 308

15.1.11 Thresholds
For quality supervision purposes, the recorded errors through the performance
counters can be compared to threshold levels. If a counter value has crossed a
threshold level, a Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) is transmitted to the alarm
manager.
The threshold values are defined in threshold tables together with a severity and a
flag indicating whether crossing this value should be notified by an alarm and
logged or only stored in the current problem list. The user can modify and delete
such tables.
Different thresholds can be assigned for near end and far end and for granularity
of 15 minutes and 24 hours.
The TCA only reports the value of the counter, which has crossed the threshold, it
does not provide a complete set of all counters. Therefore, the user has to explicitly
retrieve all current performance data after receiving the alarm. The user can
retrieve this information from the Current Performance Management Data Dialog..
Two thresholds mechanism are supported:
- For 24-hour (implicit clearance) monitoring periods, one threshold value is
defined: if the event count reaches or exceeds the threshold value during the
monitoring period, a TCA is generated. To clear a TCA, the alarm must be
manually acknowledged by the user.
- For 15-minute (explicit clearance) monitoring periods, two threshold values (set,
reset) are defined: a TCA is generated during the monitoring period when the
event count reaches or exceeds the set threshold value the first time. This TCA is
automatically cleared by the system at the end of the following monitoring period
in which the event count is less than or equal to the reset threshold value and
there was neither an unavailable nor a suspect period during this monitoring
period.
The following limitations apply for explicit clearance:

The value of the low threshold is fixed to "0" (only a single threshold is
provided by a threshold table).

An SES threshold crossing is cleared at the end of the interval if no


unavailability was detected and SES had not reached the low threshold (low
threshold equal to 0).

Even in case of a suspect interval the TCA is cleared if no unavailability was


detected and the low threshold had not been reached.

Additionally an explicit clearance of TCAs for all granularity periods is executed if


one of the following events occurs during the current interval:

deletion of the current data instance,

resetting of counters,

increased thresholds (higher than current value of counters) (only for 24 h)

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

240 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

contents of the current registers are moved the first of the recent registers. When all
recent registers are full, the oldest information is discarded.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

15.2 Configuration
Use menu item Add TP to display a special TP in the Transmission menu.
Select the TP and open the PM Configuration dialog (see Figure 179. ) by clicking
on the menu item Configure Monitoring.

Figure 179 Performance Monitoring Option


This "PM Configuration" dialog serves as the main interface to all PM services. Every
configuration of all monitoring intervals is defined using this dialog.
It is possible to access the same "PM Configuration" dialog selecting a TP in the
"Port view" and opening the same Performance > Configure Monitoring option in
the Port pull down menu.
N.B. To configure PM for au4CTPs and tuxCTPs, Path Overhead Monitoring (POM) or
Supervised Unequipped Termination (SUT, not supported) or Tandem Connection
(TCT, TCM) must be created first.
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

241 of 308

NE15, near end 15 minutes page

NE24, near end 24 hours page

FE15, far end 15 minutes page

FE24, far end 24 hours page

24hBi, near and far end 24 hours page bidirectional (UAS is the sum of far
end near end)

e-e-24h, end to end 24 hours page (enable only on HPOM)

Each dataset has to be configured independently. For AU-4 CTP and TU-x CTP the
highest criterion is POM and SUT. I.e. select the POM or SUT option first and then
configure the different associated data sets.
Confirm the configuration with Apply before you continue with a different POM or
SUT option.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

242 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The PM Configuration dialog is designed as a notebook consisting of a text field, to


identify the selected TP, and page labels.
The selected TP is indicated in the first box at the top of the screen: TP Identifier.
In case of au4CTP and tuxCTPs and VcxCTP, the PM Configuration dialog also
contains an option button showing the configured POM and SUT options as follow.
(Not operative in current release)
- PathOverhMon After Matrix
- PathOverhMon Before Matrix
- TP (Performance is made on AU-PJE)
- TCM After Matrix
- TCM Before Matrix
- TCT Bidirectional After Matrix
- TCT Bidirectional Before Matrix
When more than one of the above options is chosen, a Question dialog box is
displayed; click on Cancel to continue or OK to interrupt any action.
N.B. As long as the PM Configuration dialog is open, a modified POM/SUT/TC
configuration is not automatically recognized and displayed. This may lead to
rejections or confirmations of forbidden PM configuration. Therefore make sure to
reopen the PM Configuration dialog each time the POM/SUT configuration is
changed.
Each page label presents a range of parameters for one near end or far end
granularity period (15 min. or 24 h) which together form a dataset. To select a
special page label, click on the top part of the label:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 180 PM Configuration Dialog (example)

Figure 181 PM question dialog box (example)

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

243 of 308

Activate any item within the page label by selecting the respective radio button.

Mode
o

Data Collection

Select this button to activate performance monitoring. Disabling Data Collection


leads to clearance of the current and all history data of this entity.
Create History Data

If this item is selected, history data collection is performed in the selected entity for
the corresponding TP.
Note that on disabling this mode item, no history data is available. Nevertheless,
datasets collected prior to deactivation are not cleared and are displayed after
re-enabling the item, as long as the number of displayed datasets does not
exceed 16 for 15 min. granularity.

Lock Data Collection. Not supported

If Lock is selected, PM remains enabled but data collection is stopped. All history
performance data remain available. All current values are set to zero.

EML OS Monitoring (only accessible from SH)


Not available for Craft Terminal.

Notifications
o

UAT (only available for 24 h granularity)

For 24 h granularity, UAT (UnAvailable Time) notifications are created if enabled.


This notification results in an UAT alarm in the Alarm Surveillance.
N.B. This parameter can only be selected during creation and cannot be
subsequently modified.

Suppress Additional Threshold

Disabled: the alarm is generated every time the value exceeds the upper
threshold (value up).
Enabled: after a first alarm generation, the alarm is generated again when the
value exceeds the upper threshold (value up) after the lower threshold (value
down) has been exceeded.

Threshold Table
Attach a threshold table to the selected TP. Only assign threshold tables that
match the granularity period of the datasets (i.e. a 15 min. threshold table
must not be assigned to a 24 h dataset). Otherwise the Transmission view is
blocked and only released by closing and reopening the PM Configuration
window and the Transmission view.
Click on button Attach... to open the PM Threshold Table Select dialog and
configure the threshold table (see Chapter on page ).
Select button Remove to disassociate the threshold table from the entity.
N.B. A threshold table can only be attached if Data Collection is enabled.

Set Alarm Severity UAT

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

244 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

- ASAP Id
This field shows the label of the ASAP pointer assigned to the UAT
alarm
- Set ASAP

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Allows to set new ASAP pointer for the UAT alarm. The Set ASAP button
opens the window displayed.
Confirm the configuration with the button Apply before closing the dialog.
Otherwise the configuration is lost.
15.3 Display Current Data
Use menu item Add TP to display a special TP in the Transmission view.
Select the TP and open the Current PM Data dialog (see Figure 182. ) by clicking on
the menu item Display Current Data.

Figure 182 Current Performance Data


This "Current PM Data" dialog serves to show the results and status of the
Performance Monitoring counters.
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

245 of 308

15 min, near end and far end 15 minutes page

24 h, near end and far end 24 hours page

24hBi, far end 24 hours page bidirectional (UAS is the sum of far end and
near end)

e-e 24h, end to end 24 hours page (enable only on HPOM)

All datasets available which are related to the selected TP and recorded in the
current monitoring interval are displayed in this dialog.
The following items are indicated for each entity:

Administrative State
Indicates whether the PM collection is locked for the local user or not.

Operational State
Indicates whether PM is enabled or disabled.

Suspect Data
Indicates if collection errors occurred during the collection period.

Threshold Table

Indicates which threshold table is assigned to the entity.

Current Problem List


Indicates current UAT ("Unavailable") and TCA ("Threshold Crossed") alarms.
N.B. The entry "Unavailable Threshold Crossed" indicates, that both alarms
are active. Since the text field is too small to display the full text at a time,
use the cursor to scroll the text field in this case.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

246 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

It is possible to access the same "Current PM Data" dialog selecting a TP in the "Port
view" and opening the same Performance > Display Current Data option in the Port
pull down menu.
The Current PM Data dialog is designed as a notebook consisting of a text field, to
identify the selected TP, and page labels.
The selected TP is indicated in the first box at the top of the screen: TP Identifier.
In case of au4CTP and tuxCTPs, the Current PM Data dialog also contains an
option button showing the configured POM and SUT options to display as
follow: (Not operative in current release )
- PathOverhMon After Matrix
- PathOverhMon Before Matrix
- TP (Performance is made on AU-PJE)
- TCM After Matrix
- TCM Before Matrix
- TCT Bidirectional After Matrix
- TCT Bidirectional Before Matrix
Each page label presents a range of parameters for one "near end and far end"
granularity period (15min. or 24h) which together form a dataset. To select a
special page label, click on the top part of the label:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Elapsed Time

Indicates the time, which has elapsed since the monitoring interval was
started. This information tells the user whether the data collection covers the
whole period.
At the bottom the PM results are listed.
Reset button is used to restart the counting period. Two buttons are present for
near-end and far-end periods.
Press the Refresh button to update the window contents and display the latest
data.
Using the Print button, PM data can be saved to a file or printed on paper.
N.B. If no printer is installed, there is no error message displayed to indicate this.

Figure 183 Current PM Data Dialog (example)

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

247 of 308

15.4 Display History Data

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Use menu item Add TP to display a special TP in the Transmission view.


Select the TP and open the PM History Data dialog (see Figure 184. ) by clicking on
the menu item Display History Data.

Figure 184 History Performance Data


This "PM History Data" dialog serves to show stored Performance Monitoring
counting.
It is possible to access the same "PM History Data" dialog selecting a TP in the "Port
view" and opening the same Performance > Display History Data option in the Port
pull down menu.
The PM History Data dialog is designed as a notebook consisting of a text field, to
identify the selected TP, and page labels.
The selected TP is indicated in the first box at the top of the screen: TP Identifier.
In case of au4CTP and tuxCTPs VCxCTPs, the PM History Data dialog also contains
a cascading menu that allows to choose the POM and SUT options to display
follow: ( Not operative in current release )
- PathOverhMon After Matrix
- PathOverhMon Before Matrix
- TP (Performance is made on AU-PJE)
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

248 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

- TCM After Matrix


- TCM Before Matrix
- TCT Bidirectional After Matrix
- TCT Bidirectional Before Matrix
Each page label presents a range of parameters for one "near end and far end"
granularity period (15min. , 24h, 24h bidirectional). To select a special page label,
click on the top part of the label.
All available datasets (entities), which are related to the selected TP, are displayed
in the table:

15 min, near end and far end 15 minutes page

24 h, near end and far end 24 hours page

24hBi, far end 24 hours page bidirectional (UAS is the sum of far end and
near end)

e-e 24h, end to end 24 hours page (enable only on HPOM)

The PM data is displayed containing information concerning:

Interval End Time


in the format dd.mm.yyyy hh:mm:ss.

The number of recorded events concerning an entity is divided into near


end and far end data

Elapsed Time
indicating whether the data collection was complete.

susp

indicating suspect data where collection errors occurred during the


collection period.
In case of 15 min. entities, a maximum of 16 datasets can be displayed
simultaneously for each counter, the 24h entities display a maximum of one
dataset. These figures cannot be changed by the user.
If the limit of 16 datasets for 15 min. granularity and 3 datasets for 24 h granularity is
reached, the oldest set in the list is cleared when the next data set arrives.
Using the Print button, PM data can be saved to a file or printed on paper.
N.B. If no printer is installed, there is no error message displayed to indicate this.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

249 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 185 PM History Data Dialog (example)


15.5 PM Threshold Table Selection
The PM Threshold Table Select dialog pops up if the Attach button is clicked in the
PM Configuration dialog. (see Figure 186. ).

Figure 186 Performance Threshold Tables


In addition, this dialog can be accessed using the Configuration menu:

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

250 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

N.B. Do not open several dialogs at the same time using both possibilities. Since
those dialogs are not synchronized, they could display different contents.
The dialog presents a list of existing threshold tables.
The tables are individually indicated with a number.
Each table is dedicated to a specific entities, as reported in Each table can be
modified according the operator selections.
The filtering criteria are not operative.
The user can perform the following actions:

Create / Modify / Display a threshold table.

Delete an existing threshold table


Mark the table in the list and click on the Delete button.
Note that a threshold table cannot be deleted if it is attached to a PM
entity. An error message informs the user of this situation.

Attach the selected threshold table to a TP entity. It is only available entering


from the PM Configuration dialog.

The user has to close the dialog explicitly by clicking on the button Close.

Figure 187 PM Threshold Table Select


Table 7. Threshold table entities association
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

251 of 308

layer

TPs ASSOCIATED

granularity

STM4

RS

15 minutes

STM4

RS

24 hours

STM1

RS

15 minutes

STM1

RS

24 hours

STM4

MS NE / FE

15 minutes

STM4

MS NE / FE

24 hours

STM1

MS NE / FE

15 minutes

STM1

MS NE / FE

24 hours

VC4

Path Termination NE / FE

15 minutes

10

VC4

Path Termination NE / FE

24 hours

11

VC3

Path Termination NE / FE

15 minutes

12

VC3

Path Termination NE / FE

24 hours

13

VC12

Path Termination NE / FE

15 minutes

14

VC12

Path Termination NE / FE

24 hours

15.6 PM Threshold Table Creation / Modification / Display


15.6.1 Creation
The PM Threshold Table Create dialog pops up when the Create button is clicked in
the PM Threshold Table Selection dialog.
Carry out the following steps to create a threshold table:
1 ) Enter the table name in input field Name.
Leading and succession blanks are ignored. Leaving the input field blank or
entering only blanks is not allowed and rejected.
2 ) Select a Granularity of 15 min. or 24 h for the entity.
3 ) Enter the set (Value Up) and the reset (Value Down) threshold values. Node that
the reset value if supported, will be available with 15 min. monitoring periods.
Table 1 shows the maximum performance monitoring event values.
The respective value is automatically reset to the maximum if a larger figure is
entered.
4 ) Select the alarm Severity for each PM attribute in case a threshold is crossed.
5 ) Disable Send notification if no notification message should be sent in the case
of a crossed threshold.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

252 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

6 ) Confirm the entries with Apply to create the threshold table. A number of
threshold tables can be created from the same window.
Explicitly close the window with button Close.

Figure 188 Create PM Threshold Table

15.6.2 Modification
The PM Threshold Table Modify dialog pops up if a threshold table is selected in the
PM Threshold Table Selection dialog and the Modify button is clicked.
Carry out the following steps to modify a threshold table:
1 ) Modify the upper threshold value (Value Up) and the lower value (Value down)
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

253 of 308

15.6.3 Display
The PM Threshold Table Display dialog pops up if a threshold table is selected in
the PM Threshold Table Selection dialog and the Display button is clicked.
Refer to the previous chapter for a description of the attribute values and types.
Table 8. Maximum Performance Parameter Values

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

254 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Table 1. shows the allowed maximum performance parameter values.


2 ) Modify the alarm Severity for each PM attribute in case a threshold is crossed.
3 ) Disable Send notification if no notification message should be sent in the case
of a crossed threshold.
Note that the Name (really "number") cannot be changed.
4 ) Confirm the modifications with Apply.
5 ) To modify more than one threshold table, do not close the dialog, but select
the next threshold table in the PM Threshold Table Selection dialog and press the
Modify button (see ).
Explicitly close the dialog with button Close.

Figure 189 Modify PM Threshold Table

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK

3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

255 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

16. Synchronization management

All SDH NEs require timing in order to generate the necessary synchronization and
frame phase reference information. The timing can be provided by a source
external to the NE or an internal timing generator. The derived timing shall be used
for all signals and interfaces in the NE that are related to the SDH frame structure.
Follows a brief description of the heart of the NE clock known as the
Synchronization Equipment Timing Source (SETS).
It can be divided into 2 parts:

OSC: the internal oscillator.

SETG: the Synchronization Equipment Timing Generator.

The SETG is responsible for the generation of the external timing source for the
Frame structure and the clock, whilst the internal oscillator is useful only in the
abnormal functioning "Free-running" mode that will be explained later.
The simplified figure that follows represents the internal organization of the SETS.

Figure 190 Internal organization of the SETS.


The internal sources (inputs) are:

T1: Reference obtained from incoming STM-N signals,

T2: Reference obtained from incoming 2 Mbits signals,

T3/T6: Reference obtained from an external incoming 2.048 MHz signal,

OSC: the internal oscillator.

The number of timing reference inputs depends on the configuration of the NE.
The external sources (outputs) are:

T0: is the reference output signal for the clock and signal frames,

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

256 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

16.1 Introduction

T4: is the reference output for the external equipment synchronization.

T5: is the 2 Mbit/s reference output for the external equipment


synchronization

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Other reference points:

Y: is used for communication of Synchronization Status Message (SSM)


between SETS and MST functional blocks.

S15: is used to provide notifications and loss of incoming timing reference


reporting to the Synchronous Equipment Management Function (SEMF).

Selector A provides the capability to select timing reference from available T1


inputs, either automatically based on the priority and quality level of the
candidate sources (SSM algorithm), or manual as a result of commands issued
from the managing system.
Selector B is capable of selecting timing reference from T1, T2, or T3 inputs,
according to the SSM algorithm. The capability for manual selection of the timing
source is also provided.
Selector C is only operated in manual mode, to switch between SETG output signal
(T0) and a T1 timing reference.
The squelch functions A and B mute the relevant timing references in the presence
of failure condition, or SSM threshold violation.
The choice of the timing reference is done in two ways:

Automatically:
Following a particular algorithm based on the quality and the priority of the
incoming timing signals. The automatic selection is based either on the
priority of the incoming timing source (Priority algorithm) or on the priority
and the quality level of the incoming sources (SSM algorithm).

Manually:

Following an order from the Operator.


N.B. The priority level is determined by the Operator for each candidate timing
source. It is static information. On the other hand, the quality of the source is
dynamic information, dependant of the quality of the reference clock generating
the timing.
In an SDH signal frame, the quality of the timing source is located in the Section
Overhead.
The SETG has 3 modes of operation:

Locked mode:
The SETG output is fully controlled by the external timing references (T1, T2
and T3).

Hold-Over mode:
The external timing reference is malfunctioning. The SETG during normal
functioning stores regularly the value of the external timing reference. In this
case the SETG output is controlled by this memorized value.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

257 of 308

Free running mode:


This is not a normal operating mode. The external timing reference and the
memorized timing reference are malfunctioning. In this case the SETG output
is controlled by the internal clock source.

16.2 Synchronization Management


The operations that can be done on the synchronization sources are the following:
Timing Source Configuration,

Protection Commands,

T0 Configuration,

T4 Configuration,

T0 TEST Configuration (not operative in current release)

SSU Configuration

Remove Timing Reference,

Change T4<-> T5 (not operative in current release)

Set T0 Equal T4

Change 2 MHz -> 2 Mbit (available only if T3 has been configured as timing
source) (not operative in current release)

Remove T0 Equal T4,

Transmitted SSM Quality Configuration,

Frame Mode Configuration (not operative in current release)

Show Timing Source.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Before any other operation the synchronization view has to be displayed.


16.2.1 Displaying the Synchronization View
The synchronization view can be normally opened using the menu Views options.
Using menu options, select the Synchronization option from the Views pull down
menu as shown in the following figure.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

258 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 191 Obtaining the synchronization view.


Selecting this menu option the synchronization representation will be displayed
directly into the current window instead of the current view. All the operations that
can be done on the synchronization sources are performed from this
synchronization view.
16.2.2 Synchronization View
The Synchronization view shows the external timing reference sources and the T0,
T4 or T5, generation. The selection is based on the SSM algorithm or on the priority
of the incoming timing sources. Activating the SSM algorithm implies that the
selection of the source is before done on the quality criteria and then on the
priority criteria for sources at the same quality level.
After selecting the Synchronization option from the Views menu the
Synchronization View is visualized.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

259 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 192 Synchronization View Example


Synchronization View Description
The synchronization view provides two lists of allowable timing references:

one for T0 timing output; T0 list is always present;

one for T4 timing output; the presence of the T4 list is configurable using
resource files.

T0 list contains :
- a timing reference associated to the Internal Oscillator timing source; it is always
present and it cannot be removed or redefined.
- 6 max timing reference for candidate inputs belonging to the allowable timing
reference T1, T2 or T3/T6 configurable by the operator.
T4 list contains :

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

260 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

- 6 timing reference for candidate inputs belonging to the allowable timing


reference T1 configurable by the operator.
The T0 and T4 lists are used for the management of reference timing source
protection; a 1:n protection like mechanism is used for the selection of the timing
source from T0 (T4) list of the allowable timing references, . The protection system
chooses the timing reference to generate the output T0 (T4) either automatically,
basing on the priority and quality level of the candidate sources according a
selection algorithm or manually under control of the managing system.
View elements description
Here after, the basic component contained in the synchronization view are
described:

Timing reference

Each allowable timing reference, , is represented by the graphical object


displayed in the view; the timing reference graphical object displays (with the
exception of Internal Oscillator timing reference) the following information (if the
timing source has been declared by the user):
- the name of the selected timing source
- the status of the synchronization source: (lockout, manual switch, force switch,
automatic switch, no request, failure)
- the label of the quality level of the timing input source
- the priority of the timing input source
- 2 small boxes representing the SSF (Los) and DRIFT alarms detected on the timing
source;
DRIFT means that the Frequency Offset between the external signal source and
the internal clock is high then the maximum tolerance value.
SSF means that the Server Signal Failure is sending a wrong reference signal to the
NE.
In case of alarm indication the operator can select Show Timing Source to visualize
the alarm detail.
In the timing reference graphical object associated to the Internal Oscillator the
following information are displayed:
- the name of the timing source: Internal Oscillator
- a small box representing the LOS alarm; the small box will be lighted up when all
the selected timing source are lost, indicating the Holdover or Free Running
operation mode;
- a label field representing the abnormal clock operation modes; one of the
following strings can be displayed in the label field:
- Holdover, displayed when the clock operates in Holdover mode;
- Free Running, displayed when the clock operates in Free Running mode
- empty string is displayed when the clock operates in Lock
- a label "0" representing the priority of the Internal Oscillator

Selectors

small ellipse are used to represent respectively:


- the selector A;
- the selector B;
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

261 of 308

- the selector C;

Squelch Status

boxes contained a label field are used to represent the squelch statuses T0/T4 and
T4. The box displays the configured quality level threshold and it is lighted up when
the output-timing signal is inhibited.
Output Signal

an arrow and a label field are used to represent respectively:


- the output signal T0;
- he output signal T4/T5;

line Type

the following different line type are used to link the output signals and the
respective allowable timing reference:
- A solid line between an output signal and an allowable timing reference means
that timing reference is currently used to generate that signal;
- A dashed line between an output signal and an allowable timing reference
means that timing reference is not currently in use as timing source but will act in
the protecting role.
In the same way, a solid line between T0 signal and T4/T5 signal (or T0_Test signal)
box is drawn when T0 signal is used to generate T4/T5
16.2.3 Timing Source Configuration
This functionality allows to configure the input synchronization sources and
configure or modify the timing source priority and quality.

Figure 193 Synchronization Menu


The menu options are grayed according to the current state of the dialogue box
that the user can open.
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

262 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Firstly select a synchronization source reference and after the Synchronization


menu to open the Synchronization Option List. Then select the Timing Source
Configuration option from the cascading menu, as shown in the above figure.
The following dialogue box is opened.

Figure 194 Timing source configuration for cross-Connect equipments


The Timing source configuration dialogue box which opens, displays the extracted
quality of the selected timing source. It permits to configure the following timing
source information:

Quality level,

Priority level

Extracted Quality is the actual Rx quality retrieved from the signal received from
the line.
Select an empty synch. Source reference and click on Timing Source
Configuration and then on the Input Source Choice. Figure 195. shows an example
of the opened windows.
Following the TP Search procedure described in para. on page ( rack, subrack,
board, port ) enter the physical board termination point (TP) value; these TP are :
EIS for electrical SDH port, OpS for optical SDH port.
This operation can be repeated for the entire available empty synch sources both
for T0 clock and for T4 clock.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

263 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 195 Synch. source configuration for ADM equipment


Click on the Input Quality Configuration: the option button opens the option menu
to select the desired quality level.
Timing source may have, in increasing order, five quality levels : G.811, G.812T,
G.812L, G.813, Q. Don't use (where the highest quality level is G.811 ).
If Input Quality Configuration is set to a value other than "Extracted", Rx quality is
forced to this value.
Click on the Priority: the option button opens the option menu to select the desired
priority level.
The internal oscillator-timing source will have the lowest priority (priority=0) and its
priority cannot be changed. The other timing sources will have a priority of 1 to n.
Priority of 1 is the highest priority. Levels 6...2 are intermediate levels between level
0 and 1, in increasing order of priority (i.e. 0 6 5 4 3 2 1).
When the configuration of the timing source is completed, click on the OK push
button to validate the choice and close the dialogue box. The Cancel push
button cancels the configuration and closes the dialogue box.
Positioning the mouse on the synch. source box "Port#" test, the corresponding
physical interface denomination (rack-subrack-board-port) is written on the
window bottom left.
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

264 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

16.2.4 Synchronization Protection Commands


Select the timing reference from the synchronization view. Select the
Synchronization pull down menu. You can then select the Protection Commands
to open the view. Menu options are greyed according to the current state of the
selected timing source.

Figure 196 Lockout, Force and Manual commands


a ) Invoke/Release Lockout: Locking or unlocking a timing source enables or
disables the timing source from being considered as a possible timing source
for T0 or T4.
b ) Invoke/Release Force and Manual Selection of Timing Source
General selection
A timing source can be selected manually or automatically. Furthermore, the
selection of a particular incoming timing source (except the internal oscillator)
may be forced.
This selection is independent of the priority or quality of the timing source. If the
timing source is lockout or unavailable, this operation is impossible. A timing source
is considered to be available if it is not lockout and has not a failure condition or
Priority level of 0.
The forced switch mode is terminated by releasing or inhibiting the force selected
timing source.
The manual selection option is only possible if the quality and priority of the
selected timing source are sufficient. Otherwise the automatic selection algorithm
overrules the manual selection.
If the previously manual selected timing source becomes unavailable the
automatic selection is activated.
The "Status" indication describes the current synch. status (No Request, Automatic
Switch, Failure, ...)
N.B. The internal oscillator cannot be forced or manually selected.
From the dialogue box that opens, you can confirm or cancel the operation.
To perform or release a T0 or T4 lockout, forced or manual selection, the following
operations have to be done:
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

265 of 308

Select the T0 or T4 source.

Click on the Synchronization menu.

Select the Protection Commands option then invoke/Release the Lockout,


Forced or manual Selection option.

Click on Apply in the displayed confirmation box.

16.2.5 Synchronization Configuration for T0/T4 and T4 squelch criteria


Select the available T0 or T4 synchronization sources and then the T0 or T4
Configuration... command. This command permits to select/deselect the SSM
algorithm, to set the wait time to restore and to enable the revertive procedure if
all these features are available.
In this NE revertive mode is hardware set, with fixed WTR.
In Revertive mode the internal selector A/B changes every time to the best
reference clock with the highest quality; on the same quality level basis the
reference clock Source with the best priority will be selected. The changing
mechanism of the reference inputs is controlled by the wait time to restore: this
time sets a delay before to change the input source.
Selecting the T0 or T4 Configuration set the SSM algorithm and the Wait To Restore
Time in the dialog box upper part.
Click on the SSM Algorithm to select/deselect it.
Wait To Restore Time button and Revertive option button are disabled
Selecting T4 Configuration it is possible to set the T4 squelch criteria in the bottom
dialog box.
This functionality allows configuring the external timing reference (T4) squelch
criteria. The squelch function mutes the relevant timing references in the presence
of a failure condition.
Squelch may be forced by the Operator or according to squelch criteria which
consists in a choice of quality level.
Different squelch criteria may be applied:

when T0 is selected to generate T4 (squelch B ): T0 may be squelched if all


the allowable timing references of Selector B have Quality Level lower than
the programmable threshold.

when T1 is selected to generate T4 (squelch A ) :T1 may be squelched if T1


Quality Level is lower than the programmable threshold or if it becomes
unavailable.

The T0/T4 and T1/T4 squelch fields enables you to configure the quality level of the
T0 or T4 timing source, opening the relevant option menu.
When the configuration of T0/T4 Configuration is completed, click on the OK
button to validate the choice and close the dialogue box.
The T5 output field allows selecting the bit used (from #4 to #8) for SSM.
The Cancel push button cancels the configuration and closes the dialogue box.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

266 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Manual selection is not operative in the current release

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The T4 squelch configuration dialogue box enables you to configure the quality
level of the T4 timing source.
Click on the T0: option button to open the option menu and select the desired
quality level.
Click on the T4: option button to open the option menu and select the desired
quality level.
The T4 Force Squelch enables you to activate the T4 forced squelch.
When the configuration of T0/T4 Configuration is completed, click on the OK push
button to validate the choice and close the dialogue box.
The Cancel push button cancels the configuration and closes the dialogue box.

Figure 197 Configuring the T0 or T4 SSM algorithm and the squelch criteria

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

267 of 308

16.2.6 SSU Configuration


Not operative in current release.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The SSU configuration command allows either to configure the single NE or the NE
with SSU. In the last case the SSU quality has to be defined.
Selecting SSU Configuration from the Synchronization menu.

Figure 198 SSU Configuration


16.2.7 Remove Timing Reference
Select the synch. source to remove and click on the Remove Timing Reference
option. To remove the selected source click on "OK" button of the confirmation
message.

Figure 199 Synchronization source removing

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

268 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

To remove the selected source click on "OK" button of the confirmation message.

Figure 200 Synchronization source removing confirmation


16.2.8 Change T4 <-> T5
Not operative in current release.
This Menu allows the change of the synchronization physical interface from 2Mhz
(T4) to 2 Mbit/s (T5) and vice versa
This menu is enabled only if the SERGI board is present in the subrack
Select Change T4 <-> T5 from the Synchronization.

Figure 201 Change T4 <-> T5 menu


A confirmation message appears

Figure 202 Change T4 <-> T5 confirmation message


01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

269 of 308

Figure 203 Change T4 <-> T5: command execution


16.2.9 Change 2Mbit ->2MHz
Not operative in current release.
This menu is enabled only if the operator selects a protection unit which have as
source a 2 MHz or a 2 Mbit/s without traffic
Select Change 2Mbit -> 2MHz from the Synchronization

Figure 204 Change 2Mbit -->2MHz menu


A confirmation message appears

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

270 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Click on ok to confirm; the new window display T5 inserted of T4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 205 Change 2Mbit -->2MHz confirmation message


Click on ok to confirm
The label of the protection unit will be changed depending on the kind of source
selected:

If the selected protection unit is a 2 MHz, then the label will be changed into
2Mbit/s.

If the selected protection unit is a 2 Mbit/s, then the label will be changed
into 2MHz

Figure 206 Change 2MHz -->2Mbit: command execution


16.2.10 Set and Remove T0 Equal T5
To connect T0 internal synch. select a synch. source and click on Set T0 Equal
T5menu option. The connection between T0/T5 will pass from a shaped to a
continue line as in the example of Figure 198.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

271 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 207 T5 equal T0 setting


To separate T5 from T0 click on the "Remove T0 Equal T5" menu option. The T0/T5
connection will become shaped while the connection between T1/T5 will pass
from a shaped to a continue line.
16.2.11 Transmission of SSM Quality Configuration
Select the T1 SDH Reference Source in the Synchronization View hence the
Transmission SSM Quality Configuration is enabled. This selection allows, with the
Inserted option, to transmit the system internal T0 clock quality towards the external
SDH interface. It is also possible to transmit different quality level selecting a
different value.
Click on Transmitted SSM Quality Configuration of the Synchronization menu
option.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

272 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 208 Transmission SSM Quality


This Transmission SSM Quality window can be also opened from any SDH boards.
Select the Equipment option of the View menu, then access the Board view> Port
view> Physical Media> SDH Tx Quality Configuration; it is also possible to open the
window selecting the Transmission option of the View menu, then access the
Physical Media> SDH Tx Quality Configuration option.
In both cases select the MST block
16.2.12 Show Timing Source
Selecting any T1 or T2 Reference Source in the Synchronization View hence the
Show Timing Source is enabled. This selection allows analysing
The input source considering its payload structure and the related alarms (Port
view is presented) .
Click on Show Timing Source of the Synchronization menu option.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

273 of 308

Figure 209 Timing Source Example

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK

3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

274 of 308
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

17. ISA Port CONFIGURATION

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

17.1 Introduction
This Chapter describes the operations necessary for the ATM/ISA/ETH boards
creation in the Equipment view and the ATM/ISA/ETH TTPs creation; as a matter of
fact, ATM/ISA/ETH boards does not create TTPs when they are configurated.
The ATM/ETH/IP board creation is performed when a CT user sets an ATM/ISA/ETH
board and then configure the IP Address.
For the TTPs creation refer ATM/ISA/ETH board TTPs creation where all the operation
are explained.
For the ATM/ISA/ETH traffic configuration (for example creation of Hard/Soft cross
connection, PNNI configuration etc.) refer to the relevant ATM OPERATOR'S
HANDBOOK where "SMART TERMINAL" application is explained in details.
The operational sequence to follow to manage ATM/ISA/ETH cross-connection is:
a. ATM/ISA/ETH board declaration (Equipment Set)
b. ATM/ISA/ETH IP Address Configuration (Called ISA board IP Address)
c. ATM/ISA/ETH board TTPs creation (VC4-4c TTP, VC4 TTP, VC3XV, VC3 TTP,
VC12XV, VC12 TTP, s31 TTP, E1 TTP)
d. TTPs cross-connection
e. ATM/ISA/ETH traffic configuration with SMART TERMINAL application

17.2 ATM/ISA/ETH board TTPs creation


In this paragraph will be explained how to create, delete and modify ATM/ISA/ETH
TTPs.
ATM board
Not operative in current release.
On the ATM 4x4 board can be configured up to 16 TPs (VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP, VC12 TTP,
s31 TTP, E1 TTP) with the following restriction:
- In this release it is not possible to manage structured and unstructured TPs on
the same board
- the maximum throughput is 622 Mbit/s
On the ATM 8x8 board can be configured up to 32 TPs (VC4-4c TTP, VC4 TTP, VC3
TTP, VC12 TTP, s31 TTP, E1 TTP) with a maximum throughput is 1.2 Gbit/s.
ISA board
ISA board includes ES1-8FE and ES1-3FE board. ES1-8FE contains 8 electrical fast
ethernet port. Each one can be mapped into a virtual concatenation port as
VC3XV [including 1-2 VC3VTTP] or VC12XV [including 1-63 VC12VTTP].

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

275 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

ISA board can also have its port mapped into a SDH VC12 or SDH VC3, [1-8 VCnTTP
for ES1-8FE] and [1-3 VCnTTP for ES1-3FE], the operation can refer to FEB6 board.
ES1-8FE board
Select ISA Port Configuration option from the Configuration menu to open
the ATM/ISA/ETH ports Configuration (see Figure 210.)

Figure 210 ATM/ISA/ETH ports Configuration Creation


ISA ports Configuration window is filled with notebook pages(initially blank),
each page is an ISA board with 8 ports.
The user can Create a new virtual concatenation group (VCG) port,
Delete an existing one, Change port associations (that means modify
the concatenantion level and STM-1 Time Slot on ISA ports already created)
and navigate to the port view to show the ISA port created via the four
bottons contained in the notebook page.
When the user want to create a new VCG port he can select an empty row,
then in the "Selected Item" section, he can fill the field "Signal" choosing
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

276 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

among the available options (SDH VC3, SDH VC12, VC3XV, VC12XV) and
the field Concatenation Level choosing among the available options (1-2
for VC3VTTP, 1-63 for VC12VTTP), then push the "Create" button.
The STM1 Number and the STM1 Time Slot are automatically assigned.
If the user wants to change the port attribute association he can select a
filled row, then in the "Selected Item" section he can change the fields "STM1
number" and "STM1 Time Slot" and than push the "Time Slot Sw." button. (See
figure 211)

Figure 211 ATM/ISA/ETH ports Configuration Changing 1


If the user wants to change the port concatenation level attribute
association he can select a filled row, then in the "Selected Item" section he
can change the fields "Concatenation Level" and than push the "Change"
button. (See 212)

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

277 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 212 ATM/ISA/ETH ports Configuration Changing 2


The delete a port the user can select a row and push "Delete" button.
If the user wants to config each channel member of a created vitual
concatenation port, he can select it, and push Control Path Activation
button. See figure 213.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

278 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 213 ATM/ISA/ETH ports Configuration path controller


Select a created VCnXV, then push Navigate button, CT will navigate to the
ethernet port view. See figure 214.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

279 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 214 ATM/ISA/ETH ports Configuration navigation


ES1-3FE board
The ISA Port Configuration of ES1-3FE board can refer to ES1-8FE.
ETHERNET board
Ethernet board contains the 10M/100M Fast Ethernet board FEB6.
ETHERNET FEB6 board can be configured up to 3 VC3 TTPs or 5 VC12 TTPs .

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

280 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 215 ISA Port Configuration (FEB6)


The ETH ports Configuration window is filled with notebook pages (initially blank),
each page is an ETH board with 5 ports.
The user can "create" a new port, "delete" an existing one and "change" port
associations (that means modify the STM1 number and STM-1 Time Slot on ATM
ports already created) via the three buttons contained in the notebook page.
(The change port is not operative in current release )
When the user want to create a new ETH port he can select an empty row, then in
the "Selected Item" section, he can fill the field "Signal" choosing among the
available options (SDH VC3, SDH VC12) and push the "Create" button.
The STM1 Number and the STM1 Time Slot are automatically assigned.
If the user want to change the port attribute association he can select a filled row,
then in the "Selected Item" section he can change the fields "STM1 number" and

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

281 of 308

"STM1 Time Slot" and than push the "Time Slot Sw." button. ( Not operative in current
release )

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The delete a port the user can select a row and push "Delete" button

Figure 216 ATM/ISA/ETH ports Configuration (FEB6)


To close the dialog box click on the "Close" push button.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

282 of 308

18. Software Management

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

18.1 Generalities and descriptions


The Craft Terminal provides a set of functions, which allow software packages
manipulation within NEs. The downloading operation consists in the establishment
of session between the NE and a software server for the purpose of file transfer.
Actions can then be performed on the NE software version as update and
activation operation, or roll back to the previous software version operation. In this
way the NE can follow the product evolution with "in service" equipment.
The same function is used during maintenance phase, to update spare boards for
substitution after troubleshooting.
The operations that can be undertaken in this section are:

display Software Download Information,

initiate / Abort Software Package Download,

manage Software Packages within NEs, activating the downloaded


Software Package or coming back to the previous condition.

A backup/restore can be also done on the MIB of the NE. Indeed the MIB can be
saved to or restored from the mass storage of the Craft Terminal.
The software download general principle is represented in the following figure.

Figure 217 Software Download general principle


18.1.1 Naming Conventions
The naming conventions used for Download Management are the following:
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

283 of 308

Software Package: Software Package stands for a piece of software, which


can be executed by an NE of a particular type. It consists in one or more
Software Units and a Descriptor File. A software package is identified by its
name, release, version and edition.

Software Unit: A Software Unit is a part of a software package, which can be


either executable code, or a data segment of a particular board within an
NE. A software unit is also identified by its name, release, version and edition.

Descriptor File: A Descriptor File contains information about the software


package it belongs to and lists the composing software units. Each software
package must have a descriptor file otherwise it would not be possible to
interpret the content of the package.

Software Management Function: The Software management function offers


information about all current software packages present in an NE. Indicators
enable software management (running package, activated package,
etc...).

The following software version states are available:

Commit (active) version: the software version currently running on the NE.

Standby version: is a software version which has been downloaded on the


NE but which is not in the active state.

Two main functions are involved in the software downloading:


- Software Download Manager function
- Software Download Server function
The Software Download Manager function takes the downloading and
management requests of the operator and sends them to the NE. Thus, this
function enables a download process to be initiated and monitored by the
operator. It manages the NE software releases and initiates software download
operations.
The Software Download Server is only responsible for fulfilling the requests received
from NEs and performing software package file transfer operations to the NE.
18.2 Software download operative sequence
Two main different operative condition are defined for this Equipment:
. First installation of a 1642EMC
The NE is received without the relevant software install. The software download
must be done as described in the SIBDL section of this Handbook.
. Updating a 1642EMC with already installed software.
Follow the operative indications.
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

284 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

On the NE (i.e. once downloaded) a software package can be:


- the active version: the software package currently running on the NE
- a standby version: a software package which is neither the active version nor the
boot version

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

18.2.1 Software Download upgrade


N.B. In order to migrate from Release 1.1A to a Higher Release, the download
procedure requires
two steps. The first is from 1.1A to 1.1X (intermediate package) and the second is
from 1.1X
to the Higher Release (e.g. 1.1B1).
In order to update the following procedure is to be done as explained in the next
steps:
a ) Install the CD ROM with the NE Software Package on the PC, as for the
procedure of paragraph
18.2.2.
b ) open a session on Craft Terminal application (start Cup of the application,
start supervision and NE login)
c ) Check the present status of the software on a selected NE.
Download should not be performed in presence of unstable alarms
d ) Open the Download menu as for para. 18.3 .
e ) Select the new software package in the server and triggers the download
process, as presented at
para.18.4 . A message will indicate the completed download.
f ) Activate the package as presented at para.18.5 on page 263.
g ) Check that the activated package is in the Commit status.
h ) If problems are found with the new activated package, activate the previous
software package
(revert--back operation) to come back to the previous condition and then try to
repeat the procedure.
18.2.2 NE Software package installation procedure
The following procedure allows the NE software package installation. According to
the customer requirement two types of installation are possible:
If only SDH software package installation is required follow the instruction from
point a ) to point e ) and then download the software package SDH (example
1642EMC 1.00.05) from the EMLUSM (refer to paragraph 18.4 for details).
Procedure
a ) Install from CD ROM the NE Software Package on the Personal Computer, as
explained in the
1320CT Basic Operator Handbook.
b ) Run the 1320CT V.x platform
c ) From Network Element Synthesis (NES) choose the Software Administration
option of the
Supervision --> File Administration menu (see Figure 218. )

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

285 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 218 Software Administration menu


After the selection Figure 219. will be opened.

Figure 219 Software Package Administration view


d ) Select the <SDH> tag
e ) Press the <INSTALL> button to install the relevant software package
In the window that opens select the directory where the NE software package file
has been installed
(typically is Alcatel/usm/ect/swdw/<equipment name>/<version>/<descriptor
file>) and execute (see Figure 220. )
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

286 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 220 SDH software package installation

18.3 Software Download Manager menu


All the software download operations are carried out from the software download
manager.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

287 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 221 Equipment view


To display the software download manager menu from the main view, select the
NE on which you want to perform download operations, then select the Download
pull down menu. The following menu is displayed:

Figure 222 Download menu

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

288 of 308

18.4 Init download

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

You can request the NE to start / abort a software download operation. After
selecting the desired NE you must choose an available software package and
then start the download process. All these operations can be performed from the
SW downloading dialogue box.
Select the Init download option from the Download cascading menu.
The Software download initiate dialogue box is opened.

Figure 223 SW Downloading dialogue box example


The following fields are available to search a specific package:

Server filter: to enter the server name selected,

Package filter: to enter the package name selected.

To use the filter and display the selection, push on Apply filter(s) button. The SW
packages existing on the Craft Terminal are displayed.
In the next field the list of the packages is displayed:

Server: name of the server,

Package: name of the package,

Version: version number of package.

Click on Forced push button to set the forced download attribute: then all
software units of the Descriptor file have to be downloaded. Otherwise only the
units with different software version will be loaded.
If you want stop the download, click on the Cancel push button of the Software
download initiate dialogue box to close it.
Click on the OK push button to start the download. From the confirmation
dialogue box that opens, you can confirm or cancel the download. If you confirm
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

289 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

the operation, the SW Downloading dialogue box then disappears and the
Software download in Progress dialogue box is displayed from which you can if
necessary abort the software download.
You can monitor the download progress by means of the Software in Progress
dialogue box which also enables you to possibly abort the current download.

Figure 224 Software download in progress (example)


The Software download in Progress dialogue box displays the name and type of
the NE and the SW package name, the total of bytes, the current percentage and
the current file, which is being downloaded.
Click on the Abort push button to abort the complete download transaction. From
the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the abort.
Click on the Close push button to close the SWDL Work in Progress dialogue box at
the end of the software download.
18.5 SW package Activation and Units information
This item permits to activate the downloaded software package and to get
information about the software of the various units of the equipment.
The operator is able to get information about the software package of the NE at
any moment, even if no download operations have been performed previously.
For this, select the Units info option from the Download pull down menu.
The following dialogue box is opened.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

290 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 225 Software Package Information dialogue box (example)


The SW Information dialogue box displays the name and type of the NE, and the
respective package name and status of the committed and (if existing) the
uncommitted software.
You can select one software package by clicking on the name.
The following fields are displayed:

Software package: name, release, version, edition of the package,

Service Specific Components: name, release, version, and edition of the


Service Specific Components (example ATM, IP etc.)

Operational state: enabled or disabled,

Activation date: date and hour of the last activation

Vendor: the supplier of the product,

Current state\Action: commit or stand-by and with the option button;


none/Force/Activate/Delete

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

291 of 308

Figure 226 Detail software package (example)


Clicking on [-] symbol behind each software package all details disappear.
When you click on Close the previous view is displayed
In when you click on the:

OK push button you close dialogue box,

Cancel push button you close the SW Information dialogue box,

Help push button you access to help on context.

18.6 Mib management


This function allows to make a backup and/or a restore of the Mib.. (MIB is a data
base pertaining the configuration of the equipment).
Select the Mib management option from the Download pull down menu. The
following window is displayed:

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

292 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

current state = standby means the package is not active on the NE


current state = commit means the package is active on the NE
action = (none) means no action to do
action = activate serves to activate the selected SW package
action = force (item not operative)
Select the Activate option of the "CurrentState\Action" field, to activate the
Software package
The Sw units Det. button allows to give more information about a selected software
package.
Clicking on it, the following window is displayed:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 227 NE MIB management


The following fields are displayed:

Available backups on local server: gives the list of the backups available on
the Craft Terminal,

Backup name: to enter the new backup name.

Three push buttons allow choosing the action with click on:

Backup: performs the backup on the CT of the Mib present on the NE,

Restore: this function allows the managing system to restore the NE


configuration database of the managed system. Only one restore operation
can be performed at the same time on a given NE.

Delete: this action allows deleting a backup of the NE database. The NE is


not involved in this action. The only effect is to delete the selected backup
version stored in a specific directory of the FT server.

To activate an already restored MIB you click on Activate push button. Only at this
point it becomes operative on the NE.
To exit of the NE MIB management window, you click on Close push button.
To save or load the Mib to/from an external disk follow the indication of the "Basic
1320CT Operator's Handbook" using the menu options of the Network Element
Synthesis.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

293 of 308

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK

3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

294 of 308
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

19. Multiplex Section Protection Management

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

19.1 MSP introduction


19.1.1 Architecture types & options
The Multiplex Section Protection in the connection between two NEs protected by
cable and port duplication. At the source the signal is duplicated and sent to the
sink via two independent cables. When occurs a multiplex section failure, the
system switches to the other cable and port.
Architecture types:
Architecture 1+1 or N+1 Standard (support only 1+1 Standard)
Architecture 1+1 Proprietary (not used)
Architecture 1+1 Optimized (not used)
Architecture 1 : 1 Standard (not used)
Single ended or dual ended:
In single ended mode (unidirectional) the protection is accomplished by
switching only the signal affected by the failure.
In dual ended mode (bidirectional) the protection is accomplished by
switching both the affected and the unaffected signals.
Revertive mode & WTR
WTR is used with revertive mode, allowing to set the time wait.
Switch on SD
Signal Degrade (SD) software setting enables the MSP protection
mechanisms when a SD is recognized on the working port. The SD threshold
reference values depend on the NE selected threshold on the MS
termination point.
For current release, 1642 EM supports only 1+1 Standard architecture, only single
ended mode is supported, only non-revertive mode is supported, and the WTR time
& SD setting is not applicable.
19.1.2 Access MSP functionalities from USM
All the MSP options are available starting from the Port View following the step
explained below:
- Select Equipment from the Views menu
- Double click on the SDH optical board to configure to open the port icon
- Double click on the port icon to open the port view
- Select the MSP block in the port view and then choose the MSP options by
clicking on Port -> MSP menu; the possible choice are:
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

295 of 308

MSP Create

MSP Management

MSP Commands

MSP Delete

The MSP functionalities are available also from the Configuration menu from MSP
Overview dialog.
19.1.3 MSP status in port view
The MSP protection state of a port is displayed at the bottom of the Port view.
Some examples are reported in Figure below.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

296 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

MSP Create, MSP Management, MSP Commands and MSP Delete can also be
accessed from the Transmission-> MSP menu

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 228. MSP Protection Status Examples


The following states are displayed:
Port Status - Active (red color) or Standby (orange color). The active
protection status is referred to a protected/protecting port (where the
traffic is transported): when a failure is detected, the protecting port is
ready to save the traffic (and becomes active). The standby
protection status is referred to a protecting/protected port that is
ready to save the traffic.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

297 of 308

MSP Group Status, MSP Own Unit and MSP Related Unit - (green color) Displayed if
an automatic switch is requested. "Own Unit" stands for the currently displayed unit
in the port view; "Related Unit" stands for the related unit of the same protection
group. The status indications are:
NR: (abbreviation of No Request); normal, idle condition, the traffic is
on the main port

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

DNR: (abbreviation of Do Not Revert); the SF or SD has been


recovered but the traffic is switched on the spare port
PF: a protection failure has been detected on the port
RF: a release command has been failed
FOP: a failure of protocol has been detected
Complete: = the bridge/switch actions are completed
Pending: = the bridge/switch actions are pending
The "complete" and "pending" indications precede the
following statuses:
AS: automatic protection switching enabled
MS: a manual local protection command has
been activated
FS: a forced local protection command has
been activated
LO: a lockout local protection command has
been activated
SF/SD: Signal Failure or Signal Degraded has been
detected
WTR: wait time to restore status
MSP Request Source - (green color) indicates where the operator commands
(force/manual/lockout) have been performed. Only present when a command is
operative.
- Local: switch due to near end SD/SF or local user switch command
- Remote: switch due to received K1/K2 bytes.
A remote switch cannot be released locally, but can be overwritten
by a switch with higher priority.
MSP Protocol Status
This parameter indicates the current APS Protocol status.
The following values are possible:
- OK
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

298 of 308

- Failure (in case of FOP)


19.2 MSP Create

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Use the MspCreate button from MSP Overview dialog, or select the MSP Create
option from the Port -> MSP menu (see Figure below.) to open the MSP Schema
Creation.

Figure 229. MSP Create Option

Figure 230. MSP Schema Creation


In this release only one MSP Protection Schema is supported:
-

MSP 1+1 standard

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

299 of 308

Select the Choose Port button to define the "Protected Port" and "Protecting Port"
units.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure below is opened

Figure 231. TP Search


Click on Rack-Subrack and select the Board (Protected/Protecting) on the
"Equipment" window (left side).
The "termination Points" list (right side) is available after the search.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

300 of 308

On this right side select the OpS TP of the chosen board and then click on the OK
button. It is possible to select the board through the "Board History" button
selecting the board list menu.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The "Filter Section" is divided into different fields. It permits to visualize a reduced TP
Class. If used, OpS class must be selected. The complete TP research description is
reported in the "Transmission View".
Click on the OK button and repeat the operation for both Protected Port" and
"Protecting Port". If it has been selected a Protected/Protecting port configured in
a previously MSP schema protection an error message of access denied will be
appear on the screen.
At the end click on the OK button to confirm the MSP protection schema
configuration. An error message will be appear if the NE does not support the
selected schema
19.3 MSP Management
Select the MSP Management option from the Port -> MSP menu (see Figure below)
to open the MSP Schema Configuration.

Figure 232. MSP Management Option


The MSP Schema Configuration dialog shows the current state of the MSP schema,
setting and state (protected or protecting) of the current SDH port.
Normally, the configuration dialog allows setting the configuration parameters as
described in previous paragraph .
And it can be used to modify the schema parameters of an active MSP
configuration.
In the current release, all the schema parameters are fixed, i.e. 1642 EM r2.3
supports only 1+1 Standard architecture, only single ended mode is supported,
only non-revertive mode is supported, and the WTR time & SD setting is not
applicable.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

301 of 308

19.4 MSP Delete

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Select the MSP Delete option from the Port->MSP menu (see Figure below.) to open
the "MSP Schema Deletion".

Figure 233. MSP Delete option


In the dialog brought up, click on "OK" button to delete the selected MSP Schema
Configuration.

19.5 MSP Commands


Select the MSP Commands option from the Port -> MSP menu (see Figure below) to
open the "MSP Command window".

Figure 234. MSP Commands option


Protecting Port: the location of the board hosting the protecting port is displayed.
Protected Port: the location of the board hosting the protected port is displayed.
01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

302 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

The lockout of protection command denies working channel access to the


protection section by issuing a "Lockout" of protection request (on the "Protection
Status" of MSP Management). It is possible to "Lockout the Protecting Port" or
"Lockout the Protected Port"(not supported in current release); to remove the
lockout commands select Release Ping (for the protecting) and Release Ped (for
the protected).
The Force to protecting command switches the working channel (Protected port)
to the protection section (Protecting port), unless an equal or higher priority switch
command is in effect or SF condition exits on the protection section, by issuing a
"Forced" switch request for that port (on the "Protection Status" of MSP
Management). It is also possible to switch back to the working channel using
again the "Forced to" Protected port command.
For 1+1 non-revertive system, forced switch on working channel transfer the
working channel back from protection to working section, unless an equal or
higher priority request is in effect. Since forced switch has higher priority than SF or
SD on working section, this command will be carried out regardless of the working
section condition.
The Manual to protecting command switches the working channel (Protected
port) to the protection section (Protecting port), unless a failure condition exits or
an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect, by issuing a "Manual"
switch request for that port (on the "Protection Status)" of MSP Management. Its
also possible to switch back to the working channel using again the "Manual to"
Protected port command.
For 1+1 non-revertive system, manual switch on working channel transfers the
working channel back from protection to section, unless an equal or higher priority
request is in effect. Since manual switch has lower priority than SF or SD on section,
this command will be carried out only if the section is not in SF or SD condition
The Clear WTR command cancels the delay time for switching protection to
protecting port after recovery from failure/defect. (Not applicable to current
release.)
The Exercise command issues an exercise request for protection channel and
checks response on APS bytes, unless the protection channel is in use. This check
controls the k1/k2 communication protocol functionality to be sure that the
protocol is right also on the protection section.
Not operative in current release.
The Release command clears all previously switching commands.

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

303 of 308

The priority levels for the MSP commands are (from the higher to the lower one)_
Lockout. Force to, Auto-switch (SF&SD), Manual to.
Table 1. Gives the priority rules when are occurred two different commands. The
first column on the left and the first row at the top report the switch protection and
the external MSP commands. The row/column crossing gives the command or
protection result (i.e.: if an "Auto-switch" and a "Manual to" command are present,
"Auto-switch" is operative).
Table 1. MSP commands and Auto-switch protection priority
Lockout of
Forced to
Auto--switch
Manual to
Protection
Lockout of
Protection
Forced to
Auto--switch
Manual to

______________

Lockout

Lockout

Lockout

Lockout
Lockout
Lockout

______________

Forced

Forced
Forced

______________

Forced
Auto--switch

Auto--switch

______________

19.6 MSP Overview


MSP Overview allows displaying as well as search for MSP states.
Selecting the MSP Overview option from the Configuration pull down menu Figure
below opens

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

304 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 235. MSP Commands

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Figure 236. MSP overview


To Search the MSP groups two different ways of filtering are supported; a filtering
for all protection units located on a dedicated Board Type as well as a filtering for
protection units carrying a specific Status.
The search criteria can be chosen with the help of a combo box:
- Board Type: allows filtering for the MSP protected boards; the following filters
values should be offered (example):

Ignore

Status: allows to filter for all possible APS protection states; example of filters:

Ignore

NR (No Request)

DNR

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

305 of 308

Auto-SF

Auto-SD

Auto-WTR

Manual

Force

Lockout

APS Invalid (Fail)

Bad channel (Fail)

After the filter selection click on Search button to start; the field below the Search
button will be updated (see Figure below.)

Figure 237. MSP overview after Search (Example)


Each protection unit is presented with the following information:
-

Protection Group

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

306 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Port Id

Role:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

Ped

Protected

Ping

Protecting

Status (board status):

(Active)

(Standby)

(Faulty)

ET

Extra Traffic (Not operative)

Protection Status: defines the current state of the protection unit as follow

NR

(No Request)

DNR

(Do Not Revert)

Auto-SF

(AutoSwitch Signal Fail)

Auto-SD

(AutoSwitch Signal Degrade)

Auto-WTR

Manual

Force

Lockout

APS Invalid

Bad channel

(AutoSwitch Wait To Restore)


(Manual Switch)

(Protection fail condition APS invalid)


(Protection fail condition Channel Mismatch)

The colors used for each row have the following meaning:
- Green (OK): for protected units active
- Red (Critical): for protected units in fail condition, protection unit in lockout or
active on autoswitch on commands
- Orange (Major) for protected units in standby after a command and protecting
unit in standby for autoswitch or commands
- Cyan (Indicative: for protecting unit active and no fail condition present in the
schema (Do Not Revert State)
At the bottom of the MSP Overview windows are available five buttons that allow
to navigate through the MSP management views and to open the Port View.
By clicking on Open Port View the operator has a quick link towards the view
showing the correlation between the alarms and the protection states.
N.B. Before to click on one of the five buttons select a row
The buttons available are:

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

307 of 308

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization.

- Open Port view: opens the port view showing the correlation between the
alarm and the MSP protection states. It opens the port view that is related.
- MSP Create: opens the MSP Create dialog box.
- MSP Delete: opens the MSP Delete dialog box
- MSP Management: opens the MSP Management dialog box
- MSP Commands: opens the MSP Commands dialog box
Click on Close button to exit from the MSP Overview window

01
Edition
FCG - OND

1642EMC R1.2 OPERATOR S HANDBOOK


3AL 97457 ADAA TQCVA

308 of 308

You might also like